Home

MELSEC-Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User`s Manual (Network)

1. 1 0 modules 2 3 4 Chapter 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK Multiple axes system configuration The servo amplifiers can be controlled up to 16 axes By connecting slave stations excluding servo amplifiers the system can be configured up to 120 axes High speed periodic communication cyclic transmission Since transmission delay time is short delay caused during communication does not need to be considered if the link scan time of each Simple Motion module is shorter than the scan time of the CPU module Command NX 4 High speed Simple Motion modules can perform cyclic transmissions in combination with the following functions Refer to Section 3 3 e Auto transfer of data between the link devices in the Simple Motion module and the devices in the CPU module e Direct access to the link devices in the Simple Motion module by a program e Cyclic data assurance in units of 32 bits or per station e Status setting hold or clear of input data from a slave station where a cyclic error has occurred e Station reservation for future connection and others Chapter 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK 5 Irregular communications with another station transient transmission a Reading or writing data A Simple Motion module can access other stations by dedicated instructions Refer to Section 10 1 CPU module Master station Intelligent device station
2. iq Ly pa ae Name Description LED upper part on the front Refer to this section 1 LED CC Link IE Field connector section Refer to this section 2 Connector to connect the mechanical system input manual pulse generator incremental synchronous encoder or forced External input signal connector stop input 26 pin connector Refer to the MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control for details CC Link IE Field Network cable connector Connector to connect the servo amplifier Serial number plate Indicates the serial number written on the rating plate LED Display O AX ERR LED is flashing AX LED is OFF ERR LED is flashing AX LED is flashing RUN SD O O O 1 LED upper part on the front QD77GF16 RUN SD ERR Hardware failure watch dog timer error Operates normally Token pass not executed for some stations D LINK Axis error LED is flashing System error CPU stop error error in all stations station number duplication invalid network parameter Axis operation in progress An axis stops or is on standby Chapter 2_ NAMES OF EACH PART O AX O D LINK Data link in progress Data link in stopped performed detection detected E O
3. Data link may stop e Power on order To avoid incorrect input from slave stations power on slave stations before the master station f Writing and resetting network parameters When writing and resetting network parameters to the CPU module the communication with slave devices stops temporary Therefore a synchronous communication error may occur in the slave device When the error occurs in the slave device turn the power on again Chapter 5_ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 2 Network Components CC Link IE Field Network consists of components such as cables and hubs 5 2 1 Cables For wiring the CC Link IE Field Network cable use the 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables Ethemet cable f The following conditioning cables Category 5e or higher RJ 45 connector IEEE802 3 10000BASE T Double shielded STP Straight cable ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e e For CC Link IE Field Network wiring use the recommended wiring components by CC Link Partner Association e Cables for CC Link IE Controller Network cannot be used for CC Link IE Field Network 1 Product Cables for CC Link IE Field Network are available from Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Catalogs for cable are also available Also the connector processing of cable length is available for your preference Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Model manufacturer SC E5EW series Mitsu
4. Remote Operation Link Start Stop s e Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect the temporary cancellation of reserved station specification e When the master station is reset or the system is powered off The disabled reserved station setting is ignored and the slave station returns to the status set by the network parameter of the master station e Checking the station number of a reserved station The station number of a reserved station can be checked in the Reserved Station Function Enable window Refer to Section 9 6 2 The reserved station setting can also be temporarily disabled enabled using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs of the master station Refer to Section 11 3 Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 2 Selecting the target module in the Reserved Station Function Enable window Reservation of multiple slave stations can be temporarily cancelled through the Reserved Station Function Enable window all at once a Temporarily canceling a reservation 1 Connect a slave station specified as a reserved station to the network 2 Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module 3 Start the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics 4 Click the Reserved Station Function Enable button in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window The Reserved Station Function Enable window opens Temporarily enable reserv
5. Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SW00A0 to SWO00A7 Appendix 25 Appendices Stores the station number that has received an error frame from power on until the present on the transmission path at each station s PORT2 0 A line error is not currently occurred on the transmission path of each station s PORT2 1 A line error is currently occurred on the transmission path of each station s PORT2 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored status is cleared b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bd swo150 16 15 1 1w o s 7 s6 3 2 1 swo151 32 31 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 SWO0150 swo152 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 38 37 36 35 34 33 PORT2 error frame to swo153 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 54 53 52 51 50 49 detection each station SW0157 SW0154 80 79 74 73 72 71 70 SW0155 96 95 90 89 88 87 86 SW0156 112 111 106 105 104 103 102 120 119 118 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Holds the data immediately before the error This is enabled only for normal station
6. When failed 1 1 1 I 1 i Sequence scan I I 1 i Write command 1 i Write completion device 1 Device specified in D I 1 1 Write completion device Device of D 1 1 1 1 Setting data i Information specified in 1 n3 n4 n5 i I Write data storage device 1 aes Device specified in S i REMFR REMTO instruction execution status f SW0080 to SW009F a a aves en ee eye Error Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS wy Error code When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Works2 Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to Chapter 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in execution status REMFR REMTO SW0080 to SWOO9F According to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action Refer to Section 12 5 10 47 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 Program example The following program is for writing data of D850 to D949 of station No 0 own station into buffer memory address 0 to 99 of station No 17 target station when M115 is turned on a System configuration Station No 0 Station No 17 CPU module Simple Motion Head module Intelligent function module REMTO request target Buffer memory Target station SES 0 0H REMTO
7. A oe eS nee dl e O c r When there is a remote device station in the network enable block data assurance per station When the scan time of the CPU module is longer the data communication between the Simple Motion module and the slave stations may not be able to be kept constant If a synchronous communication error occurs at connecting the Simple Motion module and the slave station take measures shown below Lengthen the operation cycle of the Simple Motion module Shorten the scan time of the programmable controller For how to shorten the scan time refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used b Access to link devices Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS During a link refresh data are assured for each station as shown below Data assurance Data assurance Data assurance Data assurance CPU module Device Station No 17 Station No 18 Link refresh Link device Station No 17 Station No 18 Simple Motion module Data assurance Data assurance Data assurance Data assurance Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 5 Input and output status settings in case of failure For the Simple Motion module status of input from a data link faulty station and output status of cyclic data if a stop error occurs in the CPU module can be set Range where the settings are enabled Clearing or holding the following RX and RY input data can be selected e Master station RX Even if Clear is s
8. Host Station STAHO Master Total STAH 1 Line Star Gen Intellig ent Device Station 4 Open the refresh parameter window and set parameters as follows Project window Parameter Network Parameter Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Refresh Parameters button 000001 5 Write the parameters to the CPU module on the master station Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power Online Write to PLC Amm RESET O D or Power OFF gt ON In this example default values were used for parameters that are not shown above For parameter setting refer to the following Refer to Chapter 7 11 6 11 2 3 Setting in the head module Connect GX Works2 to the head module and set parameters Master station Station No 0 1 2 Create a project using GX Works2 Select LCPU in Series and LJ72GF15 T2 in Module Project New New Project Series LCPU x Type LI72GF15 T2 x Project Type Simple Project x Hu jage Ladder v cane CC Link IE Field Communication Head Parameter Setting Communication Head Setting PLC Name PLC System PLCRAS Operation Setti CC Link IE Field Network Setting Mode nie y NetworkNo 1 1 to 239 Station No 17 1 to 120 Operating with station No setting of CC IE Field diagnostics in master station when network No and station No are blank in online setting K Hold Store in flash R
9. 4 Detecting cable disconnections Cable disconnection is detected using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics as well as link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs Refer to Chapter 9 1 Ifa cable is disconnected a baton pass error causes Baton pass status own station SB0047 to turn on 2 30H is stored in Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 Details on the causes of error can be checked using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs corresponding to the station number where the error has occurred SB0047 Baton pass status own station SW0048 Cause of baton pass interruption 5 Checking communication error and network event history Communication errors and network events are detected using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics as well as link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs Refer to Chapter 9 1 The number of communication errors is stored in SW0074 to SW0077 The number can be cleared by Clear communication error count SBO006 2 When network event history occurs Event history status SB007A is turned on Number of network event history items is stored in Event history cumulative count SW007A The number can be cleared by Event history count clear SB0009 TEE is RS communication error count sBo009 Event count clear count clear se007A___ Event history status SWOO7A 11 19 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 6 Checking parameter status T
10. Data link start failed due to any of the following causes Remove the error cause and retry the operation e CPU module error on the own station D62DH Data link start failed e Master station duplication e Parameter error e Parameter communication in progress e Parameters not received no slave station exists e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error network gt P ee D642H f e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or parameter mismatch representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error network i ON a D643H f f e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or configuration setting mismatch 7 representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error supplementary f e D644H E e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or setting mismatch f representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error mode setting KAT s D645H e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or mismatch representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D646H Parameter error operation setting e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative D701H Temporary reserved station cancel Set the target sta
11. In this setting example default settings are used for the parameters other than those described For the parameter setting refer to the following e User s manual for the head module e User s manual for the intelligent function module 11 9 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 11 2 4 Checking the network status Once parameters are set for the master station and head module the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of GX Works2 can be used to check whether data link is normally operating 1 Connect GX Works2 to the master station 2 Start the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics CC Link IE Field Diagnostics If the following display appears data link is normal COIE Field Diagnosis ES Select Diagnostics Destination Select Module Module 1etwork No 1 Change Mod z Staton Trento totor pp Mentor Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station EA EEES O ide Disconnected staton Leoerd EE nected St IMaster 0 Inteligent 17 a Selected Station Communication Status Monitor QD Check the transient communication route from the connected station to the destination station Station No 0 No Eror Mode Online Normal Mode he reach Check the communication route you can re communication target station from the specified station MAC Address IM NAL 779R Check the cable status between the connected station and A the dest
12. y occur Default Intelligent Device Station Model Name Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Setting range If the value outside the setting range is set one of the Parameter error error code D615H to D618H will Assign RX RY points to the station No 17 to 120 Refer to Section 8 3 1 e Points Points can be assigned in increments of 16 Start Intelligent Device Station 16 to 2048 OCO 0H End OOOFH Remote Device Station 16 to 128 RX RY Setting Remote I O Station 16 to 64 To assign points equally or the same points go to e Device number 0 to 1FFFH points to the Equal Assignment or Identical Point Assignment Default varies depending on the set station No 1 to under CC IE Field Configuration Refer to Section module 16 are all invalid 7 4 1 d If the value within the setting range is set an error will not outside the setting range is set one of the Parameter error error code D611H to D614H will Assign RWw RWr points to the station No 17 to 120 Points in increments of 4 Refer to Section 8 3 1 Intelligent Device Station 4 to 1024 Remote Device Station 4 to 64 RWw RWr Setting To assign points equally or the same points go to Remote I O Station Cannot be set Equal Assignment or Identical Point Assignment e Device number 0 to 3FFH RWw RWr points under CC IE Field Configuration Refer to Section Default varies depending on the set
13. 1 station Up to 120 stations Set the station No as shown below depending on the connected device to the Simple Motion module Station No Connected device 1 to 16 Servo amplifier 17 to 120 Slave station excluding a servo amplifier Chapter 5_ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 Network configuration a Network topology The network can be wired into star topology or line topology A network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies The Simple Motion module does not support the ring topology Star topology Switching hub Line topology g000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 EERE a Star and line mixed Switching hub Switching hub 0000 0000 0000 L DODO 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Ble Bla Description The network is configured into a star using a switching hub and Ethernet Star topology cables Slave stations can be easily added to the network using his e ls Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally Use the recommended product for the switching hub The network is configured into a line by connecting the modules with Ethernet cables but witho
14. Channel 2 i Looro gt Network No 1 b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB link special register SW Baton pass status each station of SB0047 Baton pass status own station SWO0A1 1 f station No 18 e Devices used by the user M110 Control data setting command M116 Completion status indication device M111 White data setting command D220 to D237 Control data M112 Start contact D750 to D753 Write data storage device station No 0 miis Completion device AAA O For details on link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to Appendix 2 and Appendix 3 10 30 c Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS WRITE instruction setting The setting of WRITE instruction control data is as follows 0081H With arrival confirmation sets S1 D220 Execution abnormal end type data for abnormal end S1 1 D221 Completion status Setting is not required because it is set by the system Channels used by own S1 D222 oe se p223 sive ce rt hi o E 5 D225 rua station number ems Jozze Tse 0 au ste p228 Arrivalmonitoringtime O tOseconds S9 pzz8 Wrtedataleng J4woras O naa par js e S1 11 D231 Clock set Clock setflag S1 12 to D232 to Clock data of abnormal end ae S1 15 D235 e a Setting is not required because it is set Error detected station s S1 16 D236 by the system network No S1 17 D237 Error detected station number
15. Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING b Checking for error in the Simple Motion module 1 Select the Simple Motion module in the System Monitor window and click the Diagnostics button The CC IE Field Diagnostics window will open In the window identify the cause of the error and take action Refer to Chapter 9 mne fin 1 Network No 1 hange Module StationNoo O No 0 Sanon MES Monitora Start Monitor Stop Monitor Network Status Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station GetinParameter 3 Connected Scan Time O ms Errors Detected rola Disconnected Staton Legend DEAN mected St laster 0 Intelligent 19 e e iil Intelligent 17 Inteligent 18 Selected Station Communication Status Monitor QD77GH Check the transient communication route from the connected station to the destination station Station No 0 No Eror Mode Online Normal Mode Check the communication route whether you can reach 7 communication target station from the specified station MAC Address HME Mit 241 z Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Access the network the event history log Reserved Station View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Function Enable reserved stations View station ree set to ignore errors and temporarily
16. lt is only possible to view the list of reserved stations Enabled reserved stations will remain active until the master station sub master station master operation is tumed OFF or reset At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station Reserved Station List Baar 6 Clicking the OK button will temporarily cancel the reservation Legend Operation Method 57 Reserved Station 157 Reserved Station 15 Reserved Station No Setting IBN Unassigned station number Function Disable Not Selectable Not selectable Operation Method 1 Set a station to reserved station errors by clicking the appropriate station number box 2 Click the apply OK button to reflect the changes E reserved Station 17 station To Enable Reserved To Disable Station Function reed 7 Debug the slave station that has been added 9 24 Chapter 9 _CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS PONT _ e Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect the temporary cancellation of reserved station specification e When the master station is reset or the system is powered off The disabled reserved station setting is ignored and the slave station returns to the status set by the network parameter of the master station The reserved station setting can also be temporarily disabled enabled using link special relays SBs and link spe
17. 2 Open the setting window in GX Works2 Project window Parameter Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Network Configuration Settings button 3 Set parameters in the window 4 Click the End button El Network Parameter CC IE Field Network Configuration Settings Module No 1 beba Set up Network configuration Assignment Method The column contents for refresh device wil be changed corresponding to refresh parameter setting contents C Points Start Please reopen the window after completing refresh parameter setting when changing refresh parameter Start End RXJRY Setting RWw RWr Setting Refresh Device A Module No Start End Points Start End RX RY RWW RWr Reserved Error Invalid Station Alas Comment o z 1 z 0000 oorr a28 o000 _ 007 x000 256 Y1000 256 wo 128 w 10000128 No Setting 2 z 010 01FF28 0080 oor x1100 258 Y1100 256 Wso 128 w1080 128 No Setting z a 3 19 inteligent Device Station v 256 0200 ozrF tas 0100 017 X1200 256 Y1200 256 w100 128 w1100 128 No Setting a Y Refresh devices that are assigned to multiple device ranges will appear in turquoise Please refer to the following supplementary information for the device range contents Supplementary Information Station No can be set within range of 1 to 120 The station No of remote I
18. 6 1 Installation and WVITiNG oooicniiiic iii nadia a a ai g a adia 6 2 7 1 Parameterand Backup izeczi 223s tacecszd e a O a 7 2 12 Parametern ista a E A A nas AA 7 3 3 Network SONS a a A Geek Ge eek ed de eink eae ROE dee 7 5 7 4 Network Configuration Settings ccecceeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeseaeseaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaseaeeeaeeeeeeaeeeas 7 8 7 5 Network Operation Settings ceeccseceesceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseesaeesaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeseeseeseeseesatesas 7 20 7 6 Refresh Parameters cinc ited edad aa 7 21 Af Intorrupt Settings iia aaa 7 25 8 1 Fixed Cycle Communication aaea a E E na 8 2 8 2 Synchronous Communication FUNCTION oooonccnncnnncnincnnnonncnnncnnccnn crac rnc rar 8 2 8 3 Cyclic TranSMiSSiOn ii A Ab 8 4 8 3 1 Data flow and link device assignment cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 8 4 8 3 2 O ee eee ad de ee a Ae SE a 8 6 3 3 3 Directaccess tolink devices ich 8 8 8 3 4 Assurance of cyclic data integrity 00 eeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeseeseeseeeseeeseeeseneseeeseaesenseneseneeeaes 8 12 8 3 5 Input and output status settings in case Of failure ccceccceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeteeeesieeeineess 8 16 8 3 6 Output status setting for CPU module STOP ce ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaeseneseaeeeneeaes 8 18 8 3 7 Cyclic transmission Stop and Testa onooicnniccnic
19. Run the interrupt program at the status that the operation cycle over of the Simple Motion module does not occur The operation cycle over of the Simple Motion module is determined with ON OFF of Md 133 Operation cycle over flag When the operation cycle over occurs the interrupt program cannot start at the normal timing e Complete the interrupt processing in the interrupt cycle Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 8 1 Fixed Cycle COMMUNICATION ooooocnccnnconiconnconncanncnn ocn rcan rc 8 2 8 2 Synchronous Communication FUNCHION onnnoninnnnnnnnonnconcnncancancancn rc 8 2 8 3 Cyclic Transmission neen iia rca 8 4 8 3 1 Data flow and link device assignMeNt ooonccnncnininincnncnnnonncnacinacnnararararana rn 8 4 8 3 2 ALINK TEMES cc ad A e RA dose A At 8 6 8 3 3 Direct access to link devices cecceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeteaeeteeeeenseetaes 8 8 8 3 4 Assurance of cyclic data integrity eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeas 8 12 8 3 5 Input and output status settings in case of failure ceecceeeeeeeteeeeeettees 8 16 8 3 6 Output status setting for CPU module STOP cee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeeneeees 8 18 8 3 7 Cyclic transmission stop and restart cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesas 8 19 8 4 Transient Transmission cccccccescceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeaeceaeeeceeeeseaeeseaeessaeeseeeesieeeseaeessaees 8 20 8 4 1 Communications within the same netw
20. Station No Enter the network number of the Simple Motion module 1 to 239 Default Blank One master station can be set Set the total number of stations in a network excluding the master station If any reserved station is required include the number of reserved stations e Master station The number can be set when CC IE Field Motion 1 to 120 Default Blank Master Station is selected in Network Type When the checkbox next to Set the network configuration setting in the CC IE Field configuration window is selected the setting value in the CC IE Field configuration window is displayed Enter the station number of the Simple Motion module Set a station number different from those used in the same network Master station Fixed to 0 The station number of the master station is fixed to o e For the master station Set a master station mode Mode Description This mode performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission without losing their inherent speed performance This mode is suitable for a system that Online performs I O control and analog Online Normal Mode Normal Mode control and transmits large Offline amount of data for management Default Online Normal Mode monitoring and diagnostics by transient transmission Use this mode for general applications Select this mode to disconnect the Simple Motion module from the network for stopping data link with
21. Z CAUTION Before performing online operations especially program modification forced output and operating status change for the running CPU module on another station from GX Works2 over CC Link IE Field Network read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents 0 Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS Personal Handy phone System more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller Failure to do so may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction O Tighten the screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction O Perform the daily and periodic inspections according to the instruction manual Perform maintenance and inspection after backing up the program and parameters for the module and servo amplifier O Do not place fingers or hands in the clearance when opening or closing any opening Periodically replace consumable parts such as batteries according to the instruction manual O Do not touch the lead sections such
22. to the station 7 4 1 d dul 1 d module No 1 to 16 are all invalid If the value within the setting range is set an error will not occur Link refresh target devices in the CPU module are displayed for each link device of the Simple Motion Refresh Device module Target devices are displayed when refresh parameters have been set Refer to Section 7 6 Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Setting range Set this item to reserve the slave station from the station No 17 to 120 Refer to Section 8 5 No Setting elf the invalid The slave station is connected to the network station is set e Reserved Station Parameter error The slave station is reserved for future expansion No Setting error code By reserving a slave station link device assignment Reserved Station D301H will will not change even if the slave station is added or Default No Setting occur the reservation is cancelled Therefore the program All invalid for the Reserved Error Invalid Station needs not to be modified Physical connection of the station No 1 to slave station is not required 16 Error Invalid Station This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module Alias is item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module All invalid Me gt Commet this item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module All invalid See i Set the station specific mode of the slave station This Ba ae j The setting varies
23. 5 When the reading of the data specified in S2 is completed the following devices are turned on e Own station Completion device D2 e Target station Read notification device D3 Own station Target station CPU module Simple Motion module Head module D1 S2 Grea Channel 1 Channel 2 b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following Refer to Section 10 1 1 c Checking the execution status of the SREAD instruction The execution status completion or error of the SREAD instruction can be checked using the following device specified for the setting data Completion device D2 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the SREAD instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the SREAD instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the SREAD instruction fails 10 18 Own station CPU Simple Motion module Head module Own station CPU Simple Motion module Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d SREAD instruction execution timing e When completed 1 I 1 1 I I 1 Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 1 1 1 I 1 Start contact I 1 Completion device Device specified in D2 Fad 1 Completion status I I i indication
24. Command Device 6 Settings and diagnostics by GX Works2 a Setting parameters Parameters for Simple Motion modules can be set using GX Works2 Creating parameter setting programs is not necessary Refer to Chapter 7 El Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration I7 Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window Module Module 2 Network Type ICC IE Field Motion Master Station y None Start 1 0 No 0000 Network No 1 Total Stations 3 Group No Station No o Mode Online Normal Mode Y CCIE Field Configuration Setting Network Operation Set ngs Refresh Parameters Interrupt Settings Specify Station No by Parameter y Netwerk Operation Settings Tamers Let co keting Already Set passe Start I O No Valid Module During Other Statio Tata please input 16 point unit HEX to start 1 0 No in which module is mounted _ peaearzess Acknowledge XY Group Setting pieza outing Parameters Assignment Image Group Setting Check End Print Window Print Window debi Chapter 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK b Checking CC Link IE
25. Disconnected station monitor area The icon indicates a station that has not yet performed data link Icons other than _ indicate stations that had performed data link before disconnection Chapter 9 _CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Description Displays status of the station selected in Network Status When a station where an error has When a station with no station No occurred is selected setting is selected Selected Station Communication Status Monitor LI72GF1 1 EA o 2 gj een Pi Selected Station Communication Status Monitor 11726 MAC Address i si d be ow e Module Eror 4 L Station No Setting 5 qe LS elected Station Communication Status Monitor NZ2 aton No Unset MAC Address 09153411 5 Selected Station Communication Status Monitor S Module Error When a remote device station is selected Selected Station Communication Status Monitor NZ2C Station No 17 Eror Mode Online MAC Address inmimvarticesicestt Ext Basel k e 8 put 16 points PORT2 Cable Disconnected Displays operating status Normal operation 1 Error Data link is continued yellow Gation No 17 Erer Error Data link is stopped red Displays a mode Displays a MAC address Chapter 9 _CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Sets a station number for a slave station to which a station number has not been set This button is displayed on
26. Maximum operation time 2 Ifan error occurs in data link one of the following link special relays SBs turns on e Baton pass status each station SBODAO e Baton pass status master station SB00A1 e Data link status each station SBOOBO e Data link status master station SB00B1 3 When Baton pass status each station SBOOAO turns on the station number where an error has occurred is stored in Baton pass status each station SWOD0AO to SWOD0A7 When Data link status each station SBOOBO turns on the station number where an error has occurred is stored in Data link status each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 Details on the causes of error can be checked using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs corresponding to the station number where the error has occurred Refer to Section 11 3 2 b SWO05A Maximum baton pass station SW005B Maximum cyclic transmission station SWO0AO SBOOAO Baton pass status each station Baton pass status each station SWO0A7 SBOO0A1 Baton pass status master station SWOO0BO SBOOBO Data link status each station Data link status each station SWO00B7 Data link status master station If the master station is powered on before slave stations data link may be reconfigured During the reconfiguration maximum 13 seconds an error is detected using SBOOBO 11 17 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING b Checking data link status own station 1 Link scan
27. SM400 7 i Mov w1008 K2M20 JChecks CH2 warning output M22 t Processing for warning output upper limit CH2 Warning output processing a upper limit t Processing for warning output lower limit CH2 Warning output processing lower limit M24 X100E i t 1H SET Y100E Turns on Warning output clear X100E Y100E 7 gt HST Y100E Error code display and reset processing X100F t BCD W1010 K4Y30 X25 YA ser Y100F X100F Y100F lt ___i_i i ii9_ gt _ lt BET Y100F Turns off Warning output clear Outputs the error code in BCD Error clear request MCR NO END e If a response is not received for several link scans the station is determined as a cyclic transmission faulty station and the status is stored in Data link status each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 2 Write the program to the CPU module on the master station Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power Online Write to PLC STILL RESET D or Power OFF gt ON 3 Set the CPU module on the master station to RUN gt RUN C O 11 12 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 4 Set the switch on the head module to RUN When the head module switch is set to RUN the head module starts data link gt ie 5 When the following are operated on the master station an analog value is output from the D A converter module L60DA4 When X22 is turned on a digital value is set in CH1 and CH2 of the D A
28. System link start request accept status Turns on when a cyclic transmission start request by System link start SB0002 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0002 is off ON Start accepted SB0002 is on Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0055 System link start completion status Turns on when System link start request accept status SB0054 turns on and cyclic transmission start is completed OFF Start not completed SB0002 is off ON Start completed SB0002 is on Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0056 System link stop request accept status Turns on when a cyclic transmission stop request by System link stop SB0003 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0003 is off ON Stop accepted SB0003 is on Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0057 System link stop completion status Turns on when System link stop accept status SB0056 turns on and cyclic transmission stop is completed OFF Stop not completed SB0003 is off ON Stop completed SB0003 is on Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB005C Reserved station function disable request accept status Turns on when Reserved station function disable request SB0012 is accepted OFF Not accepted ON Cancel accepted Appen
29. The maximum number of writes to the flash ROM is exceeded Replace D785H Flash ROM failure j the Simple Motion module The flash ROM may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service D786H Flash ROM failure center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D800H Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D803H to D805H Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative EN e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly D806H Receive queue full f f e Use the COM instruction to increase the frequency of transient transmission 12 22 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D807H Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi
30. Z CAUTION When not using the module for a long time disconnect the power line from the module or servo amplifier Place the module and servo amplifier in static electricity preventing vinyl bags and store When storing for a long time please contact with our sales representative Also execute a trial operation Make sure that the connectors for the servo amplifier and peripheral devices have been securely installed until a click is heard Not doing so could lead to a poor connection resulting in erroneous input and output Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product O To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw O Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction 0 Do not directly touch any c
31. Z Master station overtep station No overlap Path was switched while using Loopback function IT Onn station PLC run status change Error formation Received Frame Error Error in own station module I Error in own station PLC Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 5 Select events to be collected and click the OK button Events that can be collected depend on the station type master station 6 Click each title to sort the events Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 ROA ee i A No Event occurrence date and time _ Event detected station Event history contents 0838 2013 12 19 09 11 17 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0837 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status The number of displayed events Up to 1000 events can be displayed When the maximum is reached the events will be erased in sequence starting from the oldest one and the latest events will be displayed e Incorrect display of error occurrence time and date If an error occurs during initial processing of the CPU module 0000 00 00 00 00 00 will be displayed Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 2 Clearing event history 1 Click the Clear Event History button in the Network Event History window Network Event History Collection Targe
32. cese rt fp 5 D205 a station number sine fos fuse fp st S110 pzi0_ Unused OO E 11 D211 Clock set flag S1 12 to D212 to Clock data of abnormal end dd ee S1 15 D215 Setting is not required because it is set Error detected station s by the system S1 16 D216 network No S1 17 D217 Error detected station number Program example The following program is written to the CPU module of station No 0 MOV H81 D200 MOV K1 D202 J u MOV K1 D204 J MOV HO D203 NAAA AAA MOV KO D208 J MOV K17 D205 Control data setting for s MOV KO D206 J READ instruction a FOV KO D210 J MOV K5 D209 pr rr cnc r cnc nmmmmccanmmmncos a READ instruction M101 SB47 SWOA1 0 1 r n r n MOV K5 D207 J ae Ji D200 W250 D700 M105 Execution of M105 M106 1 if M106 10 15 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 5 JP GP SREAD Reading Data from Another Station This instruction reads data from the device of another station In units of words With the SREAD instruction when data read is completed the device of the other station is turned on Data reading with the SREAD instruction can be confirmed by this JP SREAD st or GP SREAD S1 Available devices Setting data Internal device Fil Link direct device Intelligent function Ind ist Cenit Note 1 ile ndex register oe System user JOO module device 9 Others register Bit Word Star
33. each SB and SW Refer to Section 8 3 2 Example Dev Name Points Start Transfer SB a 0000 Si Y 512 0000 Transfer SW 0000 512 000 Treaster Device SB Device name name SB SB i i Miansfer Device swt Device name name Simple Motion module Setting range e Points Start Start End Default Start End 1 Transfer SB e Link Side Fixed at SB PLC Side M L B D W R SB ZR 2 Transfer SW e Link Side Fixed at SW PLC Side M L B D W R SW ZR Default Blank e Link Side 0 to 1FFH e PLC Side Within device range of CPU module Default Blank Set bit devices in increments of 16 points and word devices in increments of 4 points Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Setting range Set the link refresh ranges of RX RY RWr and RWw Up to 256 ranges can be set Refer to Section 8 3 2 Example PLC Side Dev Name Points Start End 1 Dev Name Transfer 1 alRX x y 256 1000 10FF 0000 Transfer 2 wry Transfer 3 alRWr 1000 10FF a 0000 0000 000000 OOOOFF 256 _001000 0010FF y Transfer 4 WRww v Transfer 5 X Y y x x I L i Transfer Device 2 name RY Device name RWr Points Start End Simple Motion module 1000H to 10FFH Device oooi name to mM 10FFH 000000H to 0000FFH 001000Hi to 0010FFH CPU
34. intelligent function module The abbreviation for Reliability Availability and Serviceability This term refers to usability of automated equipment PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all the items are included 1 QD77GF16 o A aorar QD77GF16 Before Using the Product Chapter 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK Chapter 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK 1 1 CC Link IE Field Network cccccccescceeecceeeceececeeceneeeeaeeecaeeesneeseaeeseaeeseeeeseaeessasessireess 1 2 1 2 Simple Motion Modules cc ccccecceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeseneeeeaeeseaeesseeesseaeeeeneeseeeeas 1 4 1 1 CC Link IE Field Network Chapter 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK CC Link IE Field Network is a high speed and large capacity open field network that is based on Ethernet technology 1000BASE T 1 Data communication High speed and large capacity data communication is available between a master station and slave stations on CC Link IE Field Network a Periodic communication cyclic transmission Data is periodically communicated among stations within the same network Refer to Section 8 3 E ooog 0000 ooog 0000 0000 0000 Master station QD77GF amm m m m m m m m Servo amplifier nn
35. o Servo amplifier Intelligent Intelligent device station device station Master station E b Servo amplifier amplifier Intelligen Intelligent device station device station Irregular communications transient transmission Data is communicated upon request Refer to Section 8 4 CPU module Command H Hinstruction Device 1234H Master station Write request j Intelligent device station Device 2 3 Chapter 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK 1Gbps communication speed 1Gbps communication speed allows high speed communication Also the cycle time can be reduced due to the improved performance of communication response Use of Ethernet cable A 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet is used for the connection interface The wiring cost can be reduced because 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables are commercially available Refer to Section 5 2 4 Flexible wiring for system arrangements The network can be wired into star topology and line topology Refer to Section 5 1 1 For star topology a 1000BASE T compliant switching hub can be used Refer to Section 5 2 2 Wiring is highly flexible because a
36. other stations Offline If the value outside the setting range is set Parameter error error code D303H will occur and the Simple Motion module will start in offline mode Chapter 7_ PARAMETER SETTING Setting range Set parameters of slave stations the number of points and assignment of link devices in the master station When the checkbox next to Set the network configuration setting in the CC IE Field configuration Refer to Section 7 4 window is checked the button will be changed to CC IE Field Configuration Setting In this manual the operation with the checkbox checked is described for explanation purpose Network Operation Set the operating status of a network if a data link Refer to Section 7 5 Settings button error occurs or the CPU module is set to STOP Set link refresh ranges between the link devices of the Simple Motion module and the devices of the CPU Refer to Section 7 6 module Interrupt Settings Set conditions for sending an interrupt request to the Refer to Section 7 7 button CPU module 2 Setting example For setting examples refer to Chapter 11 Network Configuration Settings button Refresh Parameters button Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 4 Network Configuration Settings Set parameters of slave stations the number of points and assignment of link devices in the master station Set a link scan mode and block data assurance per statio
37. 0 Appendix 2 Appendix 1 2 RX offset size information Un G63152 to Un G63359 Appendix 4 Appendix 1 3 RY offset size information Un G63360 to Un G63567 Appendix 4 Appendix 1 4 RWw offset size information Un G63568 to Un G63775 Appendix 5 Appendix 1 5 RWr offset size information Un G63776 to Un G63983 Appendix 5 Appendix 1 6 Station information Un G64016 to UNIG64041 Appendix 6 Appendix 2 Link Special Relay SB List c ccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeneeetans Appendix 8 Appendix 3 Link Special Register SW List cc cceeeeceeeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeetaes Appendix 16 Appendix 4 Processing Time 2 ccc ccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeecaceeseneeteaeesseeesaneteaes Appendix 28 Appendix 4 1 Link refresh time cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeesneeees Appendix 29 Appendix 4 2 Link scan time 0 ccceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeteneeteeeteneees Appendix 29 Appendix 4 3 Cyclic transmission delay time ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Appendix 30 Appendix 4 4 Transmission delay time of dedicated instructions Appendix 31 Appendix 4 5 Calculation formula for operation cycle 0seeee Appendix 31 Appendix 5 Comparison of QU71GF11 T2 e ceeecceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeesteeeeneeetaes Appendix 32 Appendix 1 Appendices Appendix 1 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses This section describe
38. 12 18 14 47 53 Master Station lt lt Omn St gt gt Status change Link up or ink down 0825 2013 12 18 14 47 52 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0824 2013 12 18 14 45 49 Master Station lt lt Omn St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0823 2013 12 18 14 45 48 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or ink down 0822 2013 12 18 14 45 44 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or ink down 0821 2013 12 18 14 45 44 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status mm A 50 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status E lear Event History 2 History Acquisition Setting Create CSV ge AS afresh 3 Storing event history data a Auto save feature Event history data is automatically saved on the flash ROM For this reason the saved event history data will not be erased by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system e Auto save may fail if performed between the time that the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off and on and initial processing is completed If failed the event Invalid event history data is displayed in Event history contents e Events that have occurred during one second before the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off are not saved to event history b Storing event history data in a CSV file Event history data can be store
39. A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures DAF1H Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative ES e The flash ROM may be faulty Check the wire and cable distances and f grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise DAF2H Flash ROM failure e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e The flash ROM may be faulty Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise DAF3H Flash ROM failure i The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures DAF5H to DAF7H Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative The flash ROM may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service DAF8H to DAF9H Flash ROM failure p center or representative 12 24 Chapter 12_ TROUBLESHOOTING 12 6 Checking the Status by System Monitor I
40. CPU operation status each station 1 Stores the stop error status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Station with stop error found If a station with a stop error is found the status of each station can be checked by the Operation status each station 1 SW0100 to SW0107 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Operation status each station 1 SW0100 to SW0107 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0101 CPU operation status master station 1 Stores the stop error status of the master station s CPU module OFF Normal ON Stop error occurred Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0110 CPU operation status each station 2 Stores the continuation error status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Station with continuation error found If a station with a continuation error is found the status of each station can be checked by the Operation status each station 2 SW0110 to SW0117 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Operation status each station 2 SW0110 to SW0117 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0111 CPU operation status master station 2 Stores the continuation error status of the mast
41. D753 Y M112 SB47 SWO0A1 1 MOV K5 D227 J JP SWRITE J1 D220 D750 W300 M115 Y117 3 Execution of M15 M116 oe ES 22 7 SWRITE instruction t 1 Processing program upon completion be www cece cece wc eee cece cececccccscsescccscscccss a M116 RADA NVI RIA SWAT a 3 HA Processing program upon failure 10 38 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 8 ZP REMFR Reading Data from the Intelligent Device Station Remote Device Station This instruction reads data from the buffer memory of the intelligent device station remote device station In units of words Jn ZP REMFR or n1 n2 n3 n4 D1 os o Jn Available devices Setting data Internal device Fil Link direct device Intelligent function Ind ist Goneiane Note 1 e ndex register Notet System user A a JOO module device es i Union Start contact ZP REMFR f Note 1 Local devices and file registers set for each program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Setby Data type String 16 bit Jn Jn Target network No 1 to 239 binary m Channels used by the own station 1 to 32 User m target station No 1 to 120 16 bit binary Head module The start I O number of the intelligent function module 00 n3 to FEH Upper two digits of the I O number expressed in three digits Module other than a head module Fixed to 00 is stored Start device of the own station where read data is stored D1 f System Devi
42. Error If an error occurs the cause of the error can be checked by the Baton pass status own station SW0047 and Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Baton pass status own station SW0047 and Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 may be offset by one sequence scan Appendix 9 SB0049 Data link status own station Appendices Description Stores the own station s data link status OFF Normal ON Error If an error occurs the cause of the error can be checked by Cause of data link stop SW0049 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Cause of data link stop SW0049 may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF SB004A Own station s CPU status 1 Stores the continuation error status of the own station s CPU module OFF Normal ON Continuation error SB004B Own station s CPU status 2 Stores the stop error status of the own station s CPU module OFF Normal ON Stop error SB004C CPU RUN status own station Stores the RUN status of the own station s CPU module OFF RUN STEP RUN ON STOP PAUSE or CPU module stopped due to error SB004D Received parameter error Stores the status of the received parameter own parameter status during master station OFF Parameter normal ON _ Parameter error SB0054
43. JP GP READ Reading Data from Another Stati0M o oonnionionninncnncnnconcnncnnrcnrncarncnrncarncarncarccancn 10 8 10 5 JP GP SREAD Reading Data from Another Station oonoonicnninnnininnnnncnnnonacnacnnaranarn rara rarc rara rnrcnn nn 10 16 A 17 10 6 JP GP WRITE Writing Data to Another Stati0M onoonnionninnnininninnnnnnnnnonnonncnnccrncanacr ara rara rara rnrcrnnn 10 22 10 7 JP GP SWRITE Writing Data to Another Station 000 eceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeseeeseeeseaeeeneseneseneeeas 10 33 10 8 ZP REMFR Reading Data from the Intelligent Device Station Remote Device Station 10 39 10 9 ZP REMTO Writing Data to the Intelligent Device Station Remote Device Station 10 44 11 1 Precautions for Programming 11 2 11 2 Example of Communications Between the Master Station and a Head Module 11 3 11 2 1 System configuration example 0 0 ceceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneseeeceeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseneseaeeeateneeaes 11 3 11 2 2 Setting in the Master Station 0 eee eeeeee eens eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesas 11 5 11 2 3 Setting in the head Module ocomoinioninni ii dada 11 7 11 2 4 Checking the network StatUS ooonnconininininnnnnconconncnncnnccnn nn nr cnn rr 11 10 11 2 5 Program EM A A ia 11 11 11 3 Using Link Special Relay SB and Link Special Register SW oocnccncccnocicicinicoccnacinarnnarnnnnanan
44. Network Transmission specifications Coexistence of line topology and star Coexistence of line topology and star topology y p E is possible a ee is possible ring topology Number of Servo Servo amplifier Lo t6statims stations connected stations Slave station excluding a 104 stations 120 stations in one network servo amplifier Station type Master station Master station local station Local Station Intelligent device station a Intelligent device station Connected station type Remote device station i Remote device station Remote I O station Remote l O station Appendix 32 Appendices 3 Functional comparison a Added functions The followings are the functions added in the Simple Motion module QD77GF 16 The slave device is communicated in the fixed cycle The communication cycle is the same as an operation cycle of the Section 8 1 Fixed cycle communication Simple Motion module Synchronous The processing cycles of the Simple Motion module and each slave communication station are synchronized Section 8 2 b Modified functions The followings are the functions modified in the Simple Motion module QD77GF 16 For details of incompatible functions refer to the MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual 1 Cyclic transmission Specifications Function Description Simple Motion module Master local module Reference QD77GF16 QJ
45. O station cannot be set within range of 1 to 16 Supplementary Setting Equal Assignment Identical Point Assignment Points a a Car Setting range Select a link device assignment method Points Start Enter the points and start numbers of __ Points Start link devices e Start End Start End Enter the start and end numbers of link Default Start End devices The number of stations set in Total Stations of the Number of PLCs aides network settings is displayed Enter the station number of each slave station connected to the network Station numbers do not need to be set consecutively 1 to 120 but must be unique Default Consecutively numbered The station number of the master station is fixed at o Station No 1 Station No 1 to 16 If the value Intelligent Device Station outside the setting e Remote Device Station Select the type of stations excluding the master range is set i z 2 Station No 17 to 120 Station Type station Select the station type of modules actually Parameter error Intelligent Device Station connected to the network Remote Device Station e Remote I O Station Default Intelligent Device Station error code D628H will occur Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Setting range elf the value outside the setting range is set one of the Parameter error error code e Points D615H to Assign RX RY poin
46. SH 080919ENG 13JZ48 gt troubleshooting of the head module CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module Specifications procedures before operation system User s Manual configuration installation wiring settings and lt SH 080939ENG 13JZ50 gt troubleshooting of the Ethernet adapter module CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board User s Manual Specifications procedures before operation system For SW1DNC CCIEF B configuration settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the CC Link IE Field Network interface lt SH 080980ENG 13JZ58 gt board 3 CPU module Manual name font Description lt manual number model code gt QCPU User s Manual Specifications of the hardware CPU modules power supply modules base units batteries and memory cards system lt SH 080483ENG 13JR73 gt maintenance and inspection and troubleshooting Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection QnUCPU User s Manual i f Functions and devices of the CPU module and Function Explanation Program Fundamentals programming lt SH 080807ENG 13JZ27 gt 4 Programming tool Manual name Ea Description lt manual number model code gt GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common System configuration parameter settings and online operations common to Simple project and Structured lt SH 080779ENG 13JU63 gt project of GX Works2 GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Parameter settings monitoring an
47. Simple Motion module is online A dedicated instruction cannot be executed when the mode is offline 3 When accessing another station by a dedicated instruction during CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Execution of a dedicated instruction may take some time To reduce the waiting time perform the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics using the following methods and then execute the dedicated instruction a Using the COM instruction After communication with GX Works2 using the COM instruction execute the dedicated instruction 1 Store 0 in the Selection of refresh processing during COM instruction execution SD778 2 Turnon the Selection of link refresh processing during COM instruction execution SM775 3 When the COM instruction is executed communication with GX Works2 is executed 4 Use a dedicated instruction to access another station SM402 MOV HO SD778 SET SM775 COM Dedicated Instruction Start contact b Using the service processing setting In the service processing setting of PLC Parameter PLC System of GX Works2 secure 2 or 3 ms for the service processing time For details on the COM instruction refer to the following MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction 10 4 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 2 2 Precautions for link dedicated instructions The following describes precautions when using link dedicated instructions 1 Executing multiple link dedicated instructions si
48. Station Internal No 16 No 17 No 120 1 Y o t I 1 Internal memor 1 memor i says L b fa Internal f i L No1 1 memor 1 DEVICE 1 Station 1 b Station i RX RWr No 16 1 Station 16 Station No 17 Spquence i il 2 MES Station Station No 120 i No 120 Internal memory Station 1 f f 1 f f 1 f f f i Device f f Station d No 17 Sequence sca 2 Station Station gt No 120 i Area where data is sent to other stations Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Station No 1 to 16 Output from the master station a The sending data calculated in the Simple Motion module is stored in the internal memory of the slave station in each communication cycle The sending data to the slave stations are not stored in the link devices RY and RWw Input from the slave station b The received data from the slave station is stored in the internal memory of the Simple Motion module in each communication cycle The received data from the slave stations are not stored in the link devices RX and RWr 2 Station No 17 to 120 Output from the master station 1 The device of the CPU module turns on 2 The device status data of the CPU module are stored in the link devices RY and RWw of the master station by link refresh 3 The status data of the link devices RY and RWw of the master station are stored in the link devices RY and RWw of each slave station by link sca
49. Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0827 2013 12 18 14 47 55 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0826 2013 12 18 14 47 53 Master Staton lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0825 2013 12 18 14 47 52 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0824 2013 12 18 14 45 49 Master Staton lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0823 2013 12 18 14 45 48 Master Staton lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0822 2013 12 18 14 45 44 Master Staton lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0821 2013 12 18 14 45 44 Master Staton lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0820 2013 12 18 14 45 28 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status al Clear Event History History Acquistion Settng A Create csv Fle a 4 Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 9 6 Reserved Station Function Enable A reservation for a slave station can be temporarily cancelled Use this function to cancel the reservation of a slave station when it is connected to the network or to reset it as a reserved station The devices which can execute reserved station specification and temporary cancel of reserved station setting are the asynchronous communication devices The synchronous communication devices cann
50. Station To Enable Reserved To Disable Station Function Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 9 7 Remote Operation Remote operation RESET operation can be executed with GX Works2 for the station selected on the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics window The displayed window varies depending on the station selected For the operation with a module other than a Simple Motion module selected refer to the manual for the module used The remote operation supports RESET operation only When the operation other than the remote operation is executed Not support function execution error error code D300H occurs When RESET operation is executed the operation cycle may be over the connected slave stations may be disconnected momentary or a synchronous communication error may occur Power on the system again if it happens Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 1 List of Dedicated INStruCtiONS oonnoniicninnnninininnnnonncanca caca 10 2 10 2 Precautions for Dedicated INStructiONS oonnonniinninninnnnnnnnnoncanca cacas 10 4 10 2 1 Precautions for dedicated instructions COMMON 0ooocnconcnncnnnncnncanacnannnnns 10 4 10 2 2 Precautions for link dedicated instructions 0 0 0 ee eect eeeeeeteeeteeeteeeteeeateees 10 5 10 3 Understanding the Documentation on Dedicated Instructions ooomoonionnnnnnncn 10 6 10 4 JP GP READ Reading Data from Another Station e
51. Stop This function stops or restarts cyclic transmission of the Simple Motion module Data reception from slave stations and data transmission of the own station are disabled during debugging The stopped cyclic transmission can be restarted This function does not stop or restart transient transmission The devices which can stop restart cyclic transmission are the asynchronous communication devices The synchronous communication devices cannot stop restart cyclic transmission When link start stop is executed for the synchronous communication devices and the Simple Motion module Not support function execution error error code D300H occurs Also when link start stop is executed for the multiple stations including the asynchronous communication devices and synchronous communication devices at the same time only link start stop is executed for the asynchronous communication devices The operation for the synchronous communication devices is saved as history lt gt Cyclic transmission A ee ee f 1 Station No 0 Station RX RWr Station Station Nee RX RWr Station Station No 19 Station Station No 18 Station No 19 TT ete ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee transmission stopped 1 2 3 Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module Start the
52. Un G63568 Station No 17 Offset Un G63569 Station No 17 Size in units of words Un G63570 Station No 18 Offset Un G63571 E K Un G63774 Station No 120 Offset Station No 18 Size in units of words Un G63775 Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size of buffer memory areas for each station number can be calculated using the following formulas e Offset buffer memory address 63568 station No 17 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 63569 station No 17 x 2 Appendix 1 5 RWr offset size information Un G63776 to Un G63983 This buffer memory stores the start number and the number of points of RWr for each station Un G63776 Station No 17 Offset Un G63777 Un G63778 Station No 17 Size in units of words Station No 18 Offset Un G63779 Station No 18 Size in units of words T Un G63982 Station No 120 Offset Un G63983 Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size of buffer memory areas for each station number can be calculated using the following formulas e Offset buffer memory address 63776 station No 17 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 63777 station No 17 x 2 Appendix 5 Appendices Appendix 1 6 Station information Un G64016 to Un G64041 This buffer memory stores the station s information on the network 1 Station number Un G64016 This buffer memory sets the station number The station information set
53. buffer memories Access using the DMOV instruction The start address of the buffer memory is multiples of 2 Simple Motion module RWr RWw Access by using start address No which is a multiple of 2 and in 2 word 32 bit units DMOV instruction UN HI DMOvV K100 G10 For data assurance of more than 32 bits use the block data assurance per station When the scan time of the CPU module is longer the data communication between the Simple Motion module and the slave stations may not be able to be kept constant If a synchronous communication error occurs at connecting the Simple Motion module and the slave stations take measures shown below Lengthen the operation cycle of the Simple Motion module Shorten the scan time of the programmable controller For how to shorten the scan time refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Block data assurance per station Integrity of the cyclic data is assured for each station by handshake between the CPU module and Simple Motion module for a link refresh a Setting Enable Block Data Assurance per Station in Network Configuration Settings of the master station Refer to Section 7 4 Once this setting is enabled on the master station integrity of the data for all stations is assured for each station CCIE Field Supplementary Setting 2211212 r 1 t Block Data Assurance per Station 1 A P are Back ba Select the checkbox
54. by Parameter Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set ifitisneeded No Already Set ONO Valid Module During Other Station Access 1 z Please input 16 point unit HEX to start 1 0 No in which module is mounted Je a a a Setting range Do not use the CC IE Field configuration window to set the network configuration setting The checkbox is not checked Set the network Select the checkbox to set the network configuration Use the CC IE Field configuration configuration setting in setting graphically The setting can be easily window to set the network the CC IE Field configured by selecting the module from the module configuration setting configuration window list Refer to Section 7 4 1 The checkbox is checked Default Do not use the CC IE Field configuration window to set the network configuration setting The checkbox is not checked CC IE Field Motion Master Station Network Type One master station can be set in a network Default Blank elf the value outside the setting range is set Parameter error error code D302H will occur and the Simple Motion module will start in offline mode Chapter 7_ PARAMETER SETTING Setting range Start JO No Enter the start I O number of the Simple Motion Within the number of I O points of the module in increments of 16 points CPU module Default Blank Network No
55. disconnected and reconnected seeeeeeeeeeeee 12 10 12 4 5 Communication is Unstable 2 00 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeateas 12 10 12 5 Error Code List DOOOH to DFFFH ce ceceeceeceeececeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeneeeneeaes 12 11 12 6 Checking the Status by System Monitor 0 0 eceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeaeeeneeaes 12 25 12 1 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes errors that may occur on CC Link IE Field Network causes of the errors and corrective actions 12 1 Before Troubleshooting Check that the POWER LED of the power supply module and the MODE LED of the CPU module are on If either or both are off troubleshoot the CPU module Refer to the User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection of the CPU module in use 12 2 Troubleshooting Procedure The procedure for identifying the cause of the problem and taking action is explained below For identifying the cause of the problem and taking action use GX Works2 If a slave station cannot be monitored due to an error such as cable disconnection directly connect the supported programming tool to the slave station 1 Procedure 1 Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module and open the System Monitor window Diagnostics System Monitor System Monitor a Serial Port PLC Mod
56. e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation ae ue e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are Transmission completion wait timer connected properly timeout Peers Correct the number of link dedicated instructions that is simultaneously executed within the range Refer to Section 10 2 2 1 c c Correct the number of data frame length at the request source and retry D2A3H Transient data length error the operation D2A4H Header information error in Correct the header information at the request source and retry the transient transmission operation D2A5H Target station No error in transient Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the transmission operation error operation ee A D2A7H to D2A8H ee i transient transmission operation transient transmission operation transmission operation in transient transmission and retry the operation error and retry the operation Correct the number of data frame length at the request source and retry D2ADH Transient data length error the operation Transient data transmission addressed to the own station was requested Target station No error in transient D2AFH a Check the network number and target station number and retry the transmission operation e Check if the sw
57. e If an error has occurred in the CPU module of the master station remove the cause of the CPU module error Refer to Section 12 2 e Connect GX Works2 to the master station Check if the master station is performing data link using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action Refer to Chapter 9 Replace the cables with 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables Are 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables used Refer to Section 5 2 1 Is the station to station distance 100m or less Change the station to station distance to 100m or less Is the master station connected to the network and operating normally Does the cabling condition bend radius meet the 1 Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable and correct the bend radius specification Is any Ethernet cable disconnected Replace the Ethernet cable Are other stations connected to the Simple Motion module y Power on the other stations operating normally e Check if a 1000BASE T compliant switching hub is used Is the switching hub operating normally Refer to Section 5 2 2 e Power off and then on the switching hub e Correct the wiring Refer to Section 5 1 1 If the system contains a switching hub 1 Disconnect one Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and Check that the cables are not connected as described below power off and then on the hub Repeat this operation until data link The network is configured in ring topology sta
58. excluding a stations per network A 104 modules servo amplifier Intelligent device station Available Connected stations type Remote device station Available Remote I O station Available Maximum number of networks Communication method Token passing method Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment Intelligent 32 points Chapter 3_ SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 Function List Lists of network functions are shown below 1 Basic functions The slave device is communicated in the fixed cycle The communication Fixed cycle communication i i E o Section 8 1 cycle is the same as an operation cycle of the Simple Motion module lr od The processing cycles of the Simple Motion module and each slave station Synchronous communication i Section 8 2 are synchronized 2 Cyclic transmission Function Description Reference Communications gt P gt The master station communicates l O data in units of bits with other stations using RX and RY 3 Communications f l f with other stations The master station communicates l O data in units of words with other using RWr and stationa ions RWw Communications Transfer between the link device of the Simple Motion module and the device Link refresh of the CPU module mounted with a Simple Motion module is performed Access to devices automatically and link devices Direct access to The program accesses the link devices RX RY RWr RWw SB or SW of Sect
59. from SB0002 to SBO1FF Do nat turn on or off areas whose numbers are not on the link special relay SB list Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system e For the usage of the link special relay SB refer to the following Refer to Section 11 3 Appendix 8 SB0002 System link start Appendices Description Cyclic transmission of the entire system is restarted The station where cyclic transmission is restarted is specified by the Link stop start direction SW0002 to SW0008 OFF No start direction ON Start direction enabled during start up Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e For SB0002 and SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned on SB0003 System link stop Cyclic transmission of the entire system is stopped The station where cyclic transmission is stopped is specified by the Link stop start direction SW0002 to SW0008 OFF No stop direction ON_ Stop direction enabled during start up Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e For SB0002 and SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned on SB0006 Clear communication error count Clears the link special registers for the communication error SW0068 SWO0069 SW0074 to W0077 SW0120 to SW0127 SW0130 to SW0137 SW0140 to SW0147 and SW0150 to SW0157 OFF No clear direction ON Clear
60. ignore station er Selected Station Operation 3 CPU status of the selected station an be checked by starting Semma Ed aa Change the operation state run a etc of the selected station 2 CPU resets and errors occurred before power off are recorded in the Error History window Diagnostics System Monitor System Error History button In the single Error History window the error history of CPU modules and intelligent function modules including the Simple Motion module can be viewed EA Monitor Status Connection Channel List D Stop Monitor Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Refine Search Match all of the criteria below None lear Refine Criteria Enter Refine Criteria Error History List Error Details Displayed ErrorsfErrors 24 24 Error Code Notation C DEC HEX Model Name QD77GF16 No ErrorCode DateandTime ModelName Startijo Start 1 0 Gains 00008 0323 2013 12 18 13 51 05 QD77GF16 EE AAA 00010 0323 2013 12 18 14 09 43 QD77GF16 0000 00013 0323 2013 12 18 14 36 25 QD77GF16 0000 Error and Solution Inteligent Module Information 00016 0323 2013 12 18 14 40 48 Q077GF 16 0000 00007 osc 2013 12 18 13 51 03 QO3UDVCPU 3 00012 osc 2013 12 18 14 36 23 QO3UDVCPU Eglantier 00015 osc 2013 12 18 14 40 47 QO3UDVCPU PLC CPU module error 00018 osc 2013 12 18 14 44 21 Q03UDVCPU The CPU module resulted in a
61. malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures DAEOH to DAE3H Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative DAE4H CPU module failure e Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative i Use a CPU module compatible with the Simple Motion module CC Link IE Field not supported by f f 4 cots DAE6H the CPU e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures DAE7H Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Do not set the intelligent function module switch setting DAE8H Switch setting information error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative
62. module When RX is set to Link Side X M L B D W R ZR When RY is set to Link Side Y M L B T C ST D W R ZR When RWr is set to Link Side M L B D W R ZR When RWw is set to Link Side M L B T C ST D W R ZR Default Blank e Link Side 0 to 1FFFH for RX RY 0 to 3FFH for RWr RWw PLC Side Within device range of CPU module If the value outside the setting range is set on the link side the setting will be invalid An error will not occur Default Blank Set bit devices in increments of 16 points and word devices in increments of 4 points Default button Reset refresh parameters to default NU ae Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 2 Checking method 1 Click the Assignment Image button in the Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration window to open the Assignment Image window Refer to Section 7 3 2 Select the devices to be checked and the magnification ratio in the window Esa e 0000 0000 2 Set Device PLC side El Network Parameter CC IE MELSECNET Refresh Parameter Assignment Image ofa jevice h vice Link Side h Display y h lose 5 Device Link side and e EN Display magnification aov Celene 0800 Ho800 3 The assignment image is displayed
63. on the network reserved station function disable status SB0180 is turned off 6 When the reserved station setting is restored with error an error code will be stored in Result of reserved station function enable SW0057 7 Turn off Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 SW0011 to SB0013 Reserved station specification enable request SWO0017 Reserved station function disable setting Reserved station specification enable request accept status SBOOSF Reserved station specification enabled status O O o SW0057 Result of reserved station function enable SW0181 to SB0180 Reserved station function disable status SW0187 Reserved station cancel setting status 11 24 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 1 Before Troubleshooting ssessessessessesnesnssnesnssnssnssnesnernsnnsnnntnnnnennnnntannnnnnsennnneeaeannnne 12 2 12 2 Troubleshooting ProCeCUure cceccceceseceeeceteeeseeeseeeseeeseneseeeseeeseeeseneseeeseeeseneeeneeeaeeaaes 12 2 12 3 Checking the EDS it ica a eee ieee id 12 7 12 4 Troubleshooting Dy SyMpPtOM oconconccnncnnnconncnncnn conca rc 12 9 12 4 1 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeetreeereeteees 12 9 124 2 Transient transmission cannot be performed ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 12 10 12 4 3 Station is disconnected from the network eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeeeeeereas 12 10 12 4 4 Station is repeatedly
64. per Station is enabled Refer to Section 8 3 4 Note 3 When the conditions for the secured 32 bit data are satisfied Refer to Section 8 3 4 4 Shortening the link refresh time and transmission delay time a Shortening the link refresh time Remove infrequently used link devices from the link refresh range and directly read or write the corresponding data using link direct devices This reduces the number of the link refresh points to the CPU module resulting in a shorter link refresh time Refer to Section 8 3 2 b Shortening the transmission delay time Because the link direct device allows direct reading or writing of data to the link devices of the Simple Motion module at the time of the instruction execution the transmission delay time can be shortened Link refresh is executed in END processing of the sequence scan of the CPU module 5 Precautions For cyclic data assurance of more than 32 bits refer to Section 8 3 4 Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 4 Assurance of cyclic data integrity The cyclic data integrity can be assured in 32 bit units or for each station Assurance Method Link Direct access to link Access to buffer aa PE E memories 32 bit data assurance bit data assurance Block Data Assurance per 7 X Station O Assured x Not assured 1 32 bit data assurance The RWr and RWw data can be assured in 32 bit units To enable 32 bit data assurance disable block data assurance per station Project
65. programmable controllers This manual describes the overview of the CC Link IE Field Network and operating procedure system configuration parameter setting functions programming and troubleshooting of the QD77GF CC Link IE Field Network Simple Motion module hereafter abbreviated as master local module Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC Q series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual e Unless otherwise specified this manual describes the program examples in which the I O numbers of X Y00 to X Y1F are assigned for a Q series Simple Motion module I O number assignment is required for using the program examples described in the manual For I O number assignment refer to the following QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals e Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2 REVISIONS x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Mar 2013 IB NA 0300203 A__ First edition Feb 2014 IB NA 0300203 B Additional function CC IE Field configuration window Remote operation RESET operation on
66. simultaneously executed within the range Refer to Section 10 2 2 1 c e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Correct the value in Target station number control data and retry the Target station No error dedicated operation instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Correct the value in Execution abnormal end type control data and retry Execution abnormal end type error the operation dedicated instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Correct the value in Target station number control data and retry the Specified current control station not operation exist dedicated instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative 12 16 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e Retry the operation after a while Channel in use dedicated D25AH e Change the value in Channels used by own station or Target station s channel control data D25BH Channel in use dedicated Change the value in Channels used by own station or Target station s instruction channel control data instruction A value set for the control block of the dedicated instruction is out of Invalid function version dedicated range Correct the value and retry the operation instruction e If this error pers
67. stopped cyclic transmission is restarted Transient transmission does not stop Refer to Section 9 4 The devices which can stop restart cyclic transmission are the asynchronous communication devices The cyclic transmission with the synchronous communication devices cannot be stopped restarted CPU module Simple Motion module Station No 1 Station No 16 Internal Internal Internal Device Station RX RWr 1 No 16 Station Station No 17 No 17 Station No 120 Device i Station i Station 1 RY RWw No 16 P No 16 Station No 17 Station No 120 Cyclic transmission stop Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 8 4 Transient Transmission This function allows communication with other stations when a request is made by a method such as a dedicated instruction 8 4 1 Communications within the same network Transient transmission can be performed to other stations through dedicated instructions or GX Works2 Refer to Chapter 10 Example With a dedicated instruction READ accessing another station 1 CPU module Master station Intelligent device station Command hH H READ H H i p Device Device 1234H E 1234H Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 8 5 Reserved Station Specification and Temporary Cancel of Reserved Station Setting Reserved station specification allows setting of a station that is not actually connected at presen
68. supported Supported error invalid station setting RX 0 to 3FFFH RY 0 to 3FFFH RY 0 to 1FFFH i RWw 0 to 1FFFH Device code RWw 0 to 3FFH Interrupt request to a CPU module RWr 0 to 1FFFH Section 8 5 Device No RWr 0 to 3FFH SB 0 to 1FF SB 0 to 1FF SW 0 to 1FF SW 0 to 1FF RECVS instruction IP packet transfer function AO Not supported Supported ie RX 0 to 1FFFH Appendix 34 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The
69. target station detected an error identify the Number of resends error dedicated gt D24BH cause of the error and take action instruction j ate 3 e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly 12 15 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING D24CH Target network No error dedicated Correct the network number at the request source of the dedicated instruction instruction and retry the operation Used channel error dedicated When executing the REMFR REMTO instruction set any of 1 to 32 for the instruction channel No D24DH e A value set for the control block of the dedicated instruction is out of Target station setting error range Correct the value and retry the operation dedicated instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Set the station number in the network parameter dialog box and retry the D24FH Own station No not set dedicated operation instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e The flash ROM may be faulty Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise D24EH D250H Flash ROM failure lt e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or
70. the CPU module used Setting example For setting examples refer to Chapter 11 Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 7 Interrupt Settings Set conditions for sending an interrupt request to the CPU module 1 Setting procedure 1 Set network setting parameters Refer to Section 7 3 2 Open the setting window in GX Works2 Project window Parameter Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Interrupt Settings button 3 Set parameters in the window Up to 16 interrupt conditions can be set 4 Click the End button e El Network Parameter CC IE Field Interrupt Settings Module No 1 Lo l o eE Input Format pec Y Device Code Deuce Na Detection Word Device Channel No menat Method Interrupt Condition Setting Value Connection No SI 0100 Edge Detect RX 0 Ala ja fa jajajaja fa fala jo fe fa Ja fia Ala ja fa jajajaja fa fa lalo jefe lala lla ls lle ls fo Jo Ju fon Jun La us ro Je Clear Check End Cancel Item Description Setting range DEC HEX Input Format Select the input format of the Word Device Setting Value field Default DEC Set an interrupt condition device Detection Method Select the detection timing of an interrupt generated by the device set Interrupt Condition in Device Code and Device No Word Device Setting When RWw RWr or SW is selected in Devi
71. the END processing of the scan after completion of the REMEFR instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the REMEFR instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the REMEFR instruction fails 10 40 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d REMEFR instruction execution timing When completed A A ae 2 I I 1 i REMFR 1 i i Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 ENDO END I l 1 1 l i i i i i i 1 1 l 1 Start contact 1 l 1 1 l 1 1 l I 1 i Read completion device i 1 Device specified in D2 I Tad 1 1 1 Own station CPU i 1 e a Read completion device i sean i i Device of D2 1 OFF 1 1 i 1 l 1 1 1 i I I 1 1 Setting data A 1 1 I 1 Information specified in 1 k i i i n3 n4 n5 ES i y O 1 l A 1 1 1 I I 1 l i Read data storage device 1 i Device specified in D1 OOO Ls Xxxx 1 1 l REES EIE et AE TN EEA AN REA ME AA AAA A O E NI SE T 1 r7 1 4 1 1 E i 1 Simple Motion module i 1 Channel 1 i i i a a ad dd a aa Nn E a de a et ea J 1 i i Head module 1 1 r f a 1 1 i 10 41 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS When failed Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 ENDFF0 END 0 END Start contac
72. the extension module please distribute the points of the main module to the extension module after executing this function Assigns the points equally to the link device of Station No 17 120 p Also link device being set to Station No 1 16 is deared Identical Point Identical Point Assignment Assignment Close Points entered in this field will be reflected to the Points of RX RY Setting Half of the points entered in this field will be reflected to the Points of RWw RWr Setting e Parameter processing of a slave station CC IE Field Configuration after selecting the module in the station list area Parameter Processing of Slave Station The parameters of a slave station can be set or read This can be performed when the slave station supports the parameter process The setting range varies depending on the target module For details refer to the manual for the slave station used f Command execution of a slave station CC IE Field Configuration after selecting the module in the station list area Command Execution of Slave Station The command of a slave station is executed This can be performed when the slave station supports the command execution The setting range varies depending on the target module For details refer to the manual for the slave station used Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 2 Setting on the window in the table format 1 Set network setting parameters Refer to Section 7 3
73. the slave station s Parameter error device range i D616H i setting data and retry the operation assignment error RY i i pes e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the value in the size of the link device in the slave station s Parameter error device range D617H setting data and retry the operation assignment error RX z ae e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the value in the offset of the link device in the slave station s Parameter error device range i D618H setting data and retry the operation assignment error RX ent d e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D619H to D61AH Parameter error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Parameter error device duplication D61BH RWw l Fa e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again Parameter error device duplication e D61CH RWr e Correct the value in the offset or the size of the link device in the slave station s setting data and retry the operation Parameter error device duplication F A a D
74. the year The network No of the station in which an error was detected is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area Error detected starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The S1 16 station s network j food System No Note 1 stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 239 Network No The station number of the station in which an error was detected is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area Error detected starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The station number stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally ystem S1 17 tati b tored data is not cl d if the dedicated instruction i ll Syst Note 1 Moet completed Master station 125 7DH Intelligent device station 1 to 120 Note 1 If Completion status S1 1 is Channel in use error codes D25AH and D25BH data is not stored 10 10 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored If the device setting in PLC Parameter is different between the own and target stations use S2 with double quotation marks to specify c Start device of the own station where read data is stored Specify the own station s start device D1 within the available range so that the read
75. time can be checked using Md 134 Operation time and Md 135 Maximum operation time 2 If an error occurs in data link one of the following link special relays SBs will turn on e Baton pass status own station SB0047 e Data link status own station SB0049 3 The cause of error will be stored in the following link special registers SWs e Baton pass status own station SW0047 e Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 e Cause of data link stop SW0049 SB0047 Baton pass status own station SW0047 Baton pass status own station SWO0048 Cause of baton pass interruption SB0049 Data link status own station SWO0049 Cause of data link stop 3 Detecting line errors Line errors are detected using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics as well as link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs Refer to Chapter 9 a Checking line errors on other stations 1 If other stations receive an error frame due to a line error one of the following link special relays SBs will turn on e PORT1 error frame reception status each station SB0120 e PORT1 error frame reception status master station SB0121 e PORT2 error frame reception status each station SB0130 e PORT error frame detection each station SB0140 e PORT error frame detection master station SB0141 e PORT2 error frame detection each station SB0150 2 When one of the link special relays SBs listed above turns on the station numb
76. with the system application The protective functions may not function if the setting is incorrect Use the program commands for the program with the conditions specified in the instruction manual Set the sequence function program capacity setting device capacity latch validity range I O assignment setting and validity of continuous operation during error detection to values that are compatible with the system application The protective functions may not function if the settings are incorrect Z ADANGER O The input devices and data registers assigned to the link will hold the data previous to when communication is terminated by an error etc Thus an error correspondence interlock program specified in the instruction manual must be used Use the interlock program specified in the intelligent function module s instruction manual for the program corresponding to the intelligent function module When connecting GX Works2 with the CPU module or connecting a personal computer with an intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is co
77. 000 Description Display Format Switches the display format of H W LED Information and H W Switch Information 12 25 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Shows the condition of the RUN LED RUN 0000 OFF 0001 ON Shows whether the Simple Motion module is in online mode ONLINE 0000 Other than online mode 0001 Online mode Shows whether the Simple Motion module is in offline mode OFFLINE 0000 Other than offline mode 0001 Offline mode Indicates whether the master station is duplicated or station number is overlapped M S ERR 0000 No duplication 0001 Duplicated Shows the parameter error status H W LED y PARAM ERR 0000 No error Information 0001 Error Shows the L ER LED status of PORT1 PORT1 L ER 0000 OFF 0001 ON Shows the LINK LED status of PORT1 PORT1 LINK 0000 OFF 0001 ON Shows the baton pass status of the Simple Motion module TOKEN PASS 0000 No baton token passing 0001 Baton token passing Shows the data link status of the Simple Motion module DATA LINK 0000 No data link 0001 Data link in execution NETWORK NO Displays the network number HW SW Shows the mode of the Simple Motion module Information MODE 0000 Online Normal Mode 0002 Offline 12 26 Appendices Appendices Appendix 1 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses o ooococcccincccnncconcccconcocinccnnnncnnnnos Appendix 2 Appendix 1 1 Link device area Un G59392 to Un G63007
78. 0E Warning output signal Y100E Warning output clear request X100F Error occurrence flag Y100F Error clear request Link special relay SB link special register SW S a Data link status each station station SB0049 Data link status own station SW00B1 0 No 17 Devices used by the user Device Description Remarks CH1 Digital value CH2 Digital value W1008 Warning output flag Latest error code Nesting station No 17 MO Communication condition establishment flag station No 17 M20 to M27 Warning output flag Batch output enable signal BN Digital value command to write input signal QX10 X20 to X2F x4 O Warning output reset signal x25 Error reset signal Y30 to Y3F Error code display BCD 4 digits QY10 Y30 to Y3F 11 11 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING d Program example 1 Create the following program in the project for the master station using GX Works2 Checking the data link status of station No 17 head module SB49 SWOB1 0 Rt MC NO MO Writing a digital value X22 X1000 X1007 i 1H MOV K10000 w1 CH1 Digital value setting MOV K8000 w2 CH2 Digital value setting Enabling analog output X21 X1000 X1007 1 SET Y1001 CH1 Output enable disable flag SET Y1002 CH2 Output enable disable flag X24 RST Y1001 CH1 Output enable disable flag X1000 f ST Y1002 CH2 Output enable disable flag X10907 Reading the warning output flag
79. 1 1 Link device area Un G59392 to UN G63007 ocococcoocccincccioccconoccnonccconncnonnnnonnnnnns Appendix 2 Appendix 1 2 RX offset size information Un G63152 to Un G63359 cccaccocincccoccccccoccconcncnnnnnns Appendix 4 Appendix 1 3 RY offset size information Un G63360 to Un G63567 noccccconccconoccccocccinccconnnnnns Appendix 4 Appendix 1 4 RWw offset size information Un G63568 to UN G63775 seses Appendix 5 Appendix 1 5 RWr offset size information Un G63776 to Un G63983 ecceeeeeeeeeeteeees Appendix 5 Appendix 1 6 Station information Un G64016 to Un G64041 0 0 eee eee eee eteeeeeteeeeteeees Appendix 6 Appendix 2 Link Special Relay SB LiSt ccccccecesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeseaneseneeseaeessueeeeneeseneees Appendix 8 Appendix 3 Link Special Register SW List cccsccesecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeceaeeesaaeeseaeeseaeeseeeesneeesaes Appendix 16 Appendix 4 Processing Time cccccccceeceeseeeeeceeeeaeeceneeeeaeescaceseaceesaeeceaeescaeeesaceeseaeeseaeeesueeeeaneesaas Appendix 28 Appendix 4 1 Link refresh time ccceccceeecceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeececeeseaeeecaeeeeaeeesaaeeseaeeecaeeesuseeseneessaees Appendix 29 Appendix 4 2 Link Scan time cocoa at Appendix 29 Appendix 4 3 Cyclic transmission delay time ccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesneeseaeeeeaeeesaeeeseneesnaees Appendix 30 Appendix 4 4 Transmission delay time of dedicated instructions ccecceeee
80. 10 31 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS I Control data setting for WRITE instruction Stores write data in D750 to D753 Execution of WRITE instruction d Program example The following program is written to the CPU module of station No 0 M110 t MOV H81 D220 MOV K2 D222 MOV HO D223 MOV K1 D224 MOV K18 D225 MOV KO D226 MOV KO D228 MOV K4 D229 MOV KO D230 M111 Itt MOV K10 D750 MOV K20 D751 MOV K30 D752 MOV K40 D753 M112 SB47 SWO0A1 1 11 AF AF MOV K5 D227 A J1 D220 D750 W300 M115 M115 M116 ponseestesnadcsthncniestasnaccstassncessccnaded Processing program upon completion 11 1 o eleen pocos 10 32 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 7 JP GP SWRITE Writing Data to Another Station This instruction writes data to the device of another station In units of words With the SWRITE instruction the device of the other station is turned on when data writing is completed Data writing with the SWRITE instruction can be confirmed by this i Note 3 Note 4 GP SWRITE S1 S2 Available devices Note 3 Note 4 Setting data Internal device Fil Link direct device Intelligent function Ind ist nstant Note 1 ile ndex register PE System user olsi JOO module device 9 Others i Umm a ARE Start contact JP SWRITE GP SWRITE Zia Start contact S1 A ou lapa o Y Oo O D2 O D3 O Note 1 Local
81. 1000 1000 1800 1800 aFFO 1_1FFo 3 A red part in the device of the CPU module indicates that the device range overlaps with the device range set for other refresh parameters Correct the refresh parameters The link devices of the Simple Motion module can be accessed from a program Refer to Section 8 3 3 Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 3 Precautions 4 a Device set to Device PLC Side Set a device range that differs from the one used for the following e Refresh parameters for other network modules e Auto refresh parameters for CC Link master local module 1 0 numbers used for I O modules and intelligent function modules e Auto refresh setting for intelligent function modules e Auto refresh using the CPU shared memory in a multiple CPU system b Link refresh range Set only link devices used in the CPU module for link refresh range Doing so will reduce link refresh points resulting in a shorter link refresh time c Changing link device assignment in the Network Configuration Settings window Correct the link refresh ranges of refresh parameters d Setting an extended data register D or extended link register W as a link refresh device Set the link refresh range properly so that it does not cross over the boundary between the internal user device and the extended data register D or extended link register W Refer to the user s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for
82. 16 36 lear History A 1500 AC DC DOWN AC DC DOWN 2013 12 19 10 12 59 AS 1500 AC DC DOWN AC DC DOWN 2013 12 18 15 23 00 A 1500 A0 DC DOWN AC DC DOWN 2013 12 18 14 44 21 Eror Help A 2200 MISSING PARA PARAMETER ERROR 2013 12 18 14 40 49 11500 AC DC DOWN AC DC DOWN 2013 12 18 14 40 47 y Status Icon Legend A 3150 DUPLICATNETNO DUPLICAT NETNO 2013 12 18 14 36 25 Major Eror A 1500 AC DC DOWN AC DC DOWN 2013 12 18 14 36 23 Aea Ea A 3150 DUPLICATNETNO DUPLICAT NET NO 2013 12 18 14 09 44 qa 3 el A 3100 LINK PARA ERROR LINK PARA ERROR 2013 12 18 13 51 07 A User Speck 1500 AC DC DOWN AC DC DOWN 2013 12 18 1351 03 7 1 Minor Eror Stop Monitor Create CSV File Close 12 3 2 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING CPU resets and errors occurred before power off are recorded in the Error History window Diagnostics System Monitor System Error History button In the single Error History window the error history of CPU modules and intelligent function modules including the Simple Motion module can be viewed Error History Monitor Status Connection Channel List D Stop Monitor Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Refine Search Match all of the criteria below None Clear Refine Criteria Enter Refine Criteria Error History Error History List Error Details Displayed ErrorsfErrors 22 22 Error Code Notation DEC HEX Model
83. 2 4 3 Station is disconnected from the network The following is the troubleshooting action to be taken when a station in data link is disconnected Check item Is the ambient temperature for the module within the specified Keep the ambient temperature within the specified range by taking action range such as removing heat source 12 4 4 Station is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected The following lists the troubleshooting actions to be taken when a station in data link is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected Check item Replace the cables with 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables Are 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables used Refer to Section 5 2 1 Is the station to station distance 100m or less Change the station to station distance to 100m or less Does the cabling condition bend radius meet the Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable and correct the bend radius ication Is lis any Ethernet cable disconnected Cd Ethernet cable disconnected Replace the Ethernet cable the Ethernet cable Is the switching hub normal Power on the switching hub 12 4 5 Communication is unstable The following lists the troubleshooting actions to be taken when link scan time or transmission delay time is long or when a transient transmission timeout occurred Check item If the L ERR LED is on or flashing perform troubleshooting Refer to Is the L ERR LED of the master or slave station off j Sec
84. 3 1 D303H will Default Online Normal Mode occurs and the master station will start with offline mode Select a link device assignment method e Point Start Enter the points and start numbers of Point Start Assignment Method link devices Start End Start End Enter the start and end numbers of link Default Start End devices Displays the approximate link scan time Approx be The total number of slave stations set in the CC IE No Field configuration window is displayed The module model name is displayed If a module where the profile is not registered is set the message Module without profile is displayed Register the profile before setting the model name For how to register a profile refer to the GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common Enter the station number of each slave station connected to the network STAH Station numbers do not need to be set consecutively but must be unique Default Blank The station number of the master station is fixed at o 1 Station No 1 to 16 e Intelligent Device Station y outside the i t e Remote Device Station S Select the station type excluding the master station setting range is 2 Station No 17 to 120 Station Type Select the station type same as that of the modules set Parameter e Intelligent Device Station connected to the network e error error code e Remote Device Station e i D628H will e Remote I O Station
85. 3 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 13 2 1 SW0131 Swot32 SW0130 PORT2 error frame SW0133 to reception status each station wot 96 95 90 89 88 87 86 SW0136 112 111 106 105 104 103 102 120 119 118 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWODAO to SWO00A7 Stores the station number that has received an error frame from power on until the present on the transmission path at each station s PORT1 0 A line error is not currently occurred on the transmission path of each station s PORT1 1 A line error is currently occurred on the transmission path of each station s PORT1 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 swo141 32 SW0140 swo142 48 PORT error frame to SW0143 64 detection each station SW0147 Swo0144 80 73 72 swo145 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 8s 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 swo146 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swo17 hohohihe Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0
86. 3569 i A Station No 17 RWw size F851H o RWw offset size information 0 Read Appendix 1 4 63774 Station No 120 RWw F91EH offset 63775 Station No 120 RWw size F91FH Address Decimal 5 o S5 5 63776 Station No 17 RWr offset F920H 63777 Station No 17 RWr size F921H RWr offset size information 0 Read Appendix 1 5 63982 Station No 120 RWr offset FOEFH 63983 Station No 120 RWr size F9FOH 64016 Station number Read and write FA10H 64017 Manufacturer code FA11H 64018 Model type Appendix 1 6 FA12H f 7 Own station Station network card information i Read 64019 information Model code FA13H 64020 Version FA14H 64021 to 64024 System area FA15H to FA18H 64025 Controller information FA19H valid invalid flag 64026 Manufacturer code FA1AH 64027 Model type FA1BH 64028 Own station A Station controller information Model code Read Appendix 1 6 FA1CH information 64029 Version FA1DH 64030 to 64039 Model name string FA1EH to FA27H 64040 to 64041 Vendor specific device FA28H to FA29H information Q E O K N so o O E o A 3 System area FA2AH to FA2FH Chapter 4_ PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION Chapter 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 4 1 Procedures Before Operation ccccccecscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeceaeeeseeeeeaeeeseneeseasesseees 4 2 Chapter 4_ PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION
87. 4 1 Procedures Before Operation For the procedures before operation of the Simple Motion module refer to MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control Chapter 5_ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Chapter 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 CC Link IE Field Network Configuration o ooonccnncnnnnnnncconconconcnncancanccanrcnrcnrcncn 5 2 5 1 1 Single network System ssnecsatieeiianraana ia ia i 5 2 5 2 Network Components c cccescceesceeeeceeeeneeceaeeceaeeseaceesaaeeseneeseaeecsaceesneeseneeeseeeseneesens 5 7 52T Cables vecinal das da dao 5 7 A AO 5 7 5 3 Applicable Systems ini ee eee taa 5 8 Chapter 5_ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 CC Link IE Field Network Configuration This section describes CC Link IE Field Network configurations 5 1 1 Single network system 1 Overall system configuration A single network system is a system in which a Simple Motion module master station and slave stations are connected using Ethernet cables as shown below The Simple Motion module can be connected with servo amplifiers and slave stations excluding servo amplifiers Up to 120 slave stations and one master station can be connected Also the devices which the synchronous communication function is supported unsupported can be coexisted Switching hub LJ 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Ethernet cable 1000BASE T Master station Slave station
88. 61DH RY e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or RY representative Parameter error device duplication D61EH RX e Check the transient data at the request source and retry the operation D620H Incorrect transient data e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D621H Parameter error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D622H Parameter error total number of e Correct the total number of slave stations and retry the operation slave stations error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the setting in Block Data Assurance per Station and retry the D625H Parameter error block data operation assurance per station setting error 7 PAS F e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the value in the slave station setting information setting data Parameter error slave station D627H UA and retry the operation setting information error 3 hs e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or rep
89. 71GF11 T2 Communications Communicating S Station No 17 to 120 Station No 1 to 120 Section 8 3 1 using RX and RY station Communications with other stations oe Communicating using RWr and OR Station No 17 to 120 Station No 1 to 120 Section 8 3 1 i RWw Communications RX 0 to 1FFFH RX 0 to 3FFFH RY 0 to 1FFFH RY 0 to 3FFFH Link device RWw 0 to 3FFH RWw 0 to 1FFFH Section 8 3 2 range RWr 0 to 3FFH RWr 0 to 1FFFH Section 8 3 3 SB 0 to 1FFH SB 0 to 1FFH SW 0 to 1FFH SW 0 to 1FFH Access to devices RX JONXO to JONX1FFF RX JONXO to JONX3FFF and link devices RY JO YO to JONY1FFF RY JO YO to JONY3FFF RWw JO W0 to JO W3FF RWw JO W0 to JO W1FFF Direct access to Link device RWr JO W400 to JO W7FF RWr JO W2000 to JO W3FFF Section 8 3 3 link devices range Link refresh SB JO SBO to JO SB1FF SB JO SBO to JO SB1FF SW JO SW0 to JO SW1FF SW JONSWO to JO SW1FF O indicates the network No O indicates the network No Interlink transmission Pe Not supported Supported sap il ae y Online Normal Mode Mode selection for cyclic transmission Mode Online Normal Mode A Section 7 3 Online High Speed Mode Scan synchronization specification E al Not supported Supported MR Cyclic transmission stop and restart Target station Station No 17 to 120 Station No 1 to 120 Section 8 3 7 Appendix 33 Appendices Transient transmission Specifications Function Description Simple Mo
90. CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics Click the Link Start Stop button in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window Or right click a module icon in Network Status and click Link Start Stop The Link Start Stop window opens p Connected Station Information Network Type CIE fed Network No 1 Station Type Master Staton Station No 0 Link Start Stop Setting Contents CAI Stations Information O a operating inteligent Device Station r Link Start Stop Executing Contents Link Start C Link Stop T Forced Link Start Forced Link Start will be executed for the station that is link stopped by other stations or the station that is link stopped by special relay special register Execute Issuing request for link start stop contents in stations that are on selected status in all stations information Link status might not be changed immediately because of circuit status factor Cos Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 4 Select a station for starting or stopping cyclic transmission in Selected Status 5 Select whether to start or stop cyclic transmission in Link Start Stop Executing Contents Selecting Forced Link Start will forcibly start cyclic transmission of the station where cyclic transmission was stopped by a command from another station or by link special relay SB or link special r
91. CH1 Digital value CH2 Digital value Buffer memory Warning 30H 48 output flag 13H 19 Latest error code CH1 Digital value CH2 Digital value FF RWr RWw smmm am amam m mmmn mmn amm mmn mmn am amn A A A amn mmn mmn amn amn am am ae 11 4 Chapter 11 PROGRAMMING 11 2 2 Setting in the master station Connect GX Works2 to the master station and set parameters Setting Master station Station No 0 Intelligent device station Station No 17 1 Create a project using GX Works2 Select QCPU Q mode in Series and Q10UDH in Module Project New ae uan J Type Q10UDH Project Type Simple Project ee ease o 2 Open the network parameter window and set parameters as follows Project window Parameter Network Parameter Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET IV Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window CHEF ote Mt state fieme 11 5 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 3 Open the network configuration setting window and set parameters as follows Project window Parameter Network Parameter Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET CC IE Field Configuration Setting button Link Scan Time Approx 7 RX RY Setting RWw RWr Setting Points Start End Points Start End STAF Station Type 0 Master Station 256 0000 OOFF 256 0000 OOFF
92. E FO Annunciator ON stop Program stop 11 14 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 11 3 Using Link Special Relay SB and Link Special Register SW This section describes how to use link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs For details on link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to Appendix 2 and Appendix 3 1 Stop and restart of cyclic transmission Stop and restart of cyclic transmission are executed using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics as well as link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs However stop and restart of cyclic transmission cannot be executed for the station No 1 to 16 Refer to Section 9 4 a Stop and restart of cyclic transmission other stations Cyclic transmission stop 1 Specify the station to stop cyclic transmission in the following link special registers SWs e Specifying a target station Link stop start direction SW0000 Specifying a station number Link stop start direction SW0002 to SW0008 Turn on System link stop SB0003 When the Simple Motion module accepts the request System link stop request accept status SB0056 turns on When cyclic transmission stop is completed System link stop completion status SB0057 turns on Station number of the station that sent the cyclic transmission stop request is stored in Data link stop request station SW004A It is stored in the station that received the stop request I
93. EACH PART 2 1 to 2 4 2 1 Names of Each Patt ie cs cscecc ste ce tiga cetidee atade avidin aetedesievb ide Ei aaa nev aa aAa A aN aae a aa 2 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 to 3 8 3 1 General Specifications ec a a a a a aa e a a e a A a E 3 2 3 2 Performance Specifications 00 a a dc a Reed eee eed 3 2 CRER OTa e iTo pA M E EEE A 3 3 3 4 Specifications of Input Output Signals with CPU Module oooooonoccconocccnococoncccconcconnccnonncnonnnnonncnnnncnnnnnnnnos 3 5 3 4 1 List of input output signals with CPU MOduUle c ccceeceeeecceeeceeeeceeceeeeceneeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeteaeeesieeeneeess 3 5 3 4 2 Details of input signals QD77GF CPU Module coooooincoinconicocicococanocanonanonanona nana r ana rora rra rnncrnnn 3 6 3 5 Buffer Memory Network Function sessies inae e ARa RAAE ARAETA RIERA 3 7 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 4 1 to 4 2 4 1 Procedures Before Op ration rire e aa a a e aa a Ea aa A aa aaa aa e Aaaa aaa 4 2 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 to 5 8 5 1 CC Link IE Field Network Configuration ooocoonnccnncnncnncnnccnnccnncnarncarnrancr arc r anar rr rr 5 2 5 1 1 Single network Syston E E a O E 5 2 5 2 Network Components c ccceccceeeceeeeceeeeneeeeaeeceaeeeeaneecaaeeceaeeceaeeseaeessaaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeesaneeseaeessaeessaeeeeeeeesaas 5 7 bs Ane CAES a a e de eC eee ee e 5 7 9 22 UDS ca ta AS e a ROO stands 5 7 5 3 Applicable System S in iiidid aetna A it 5 8 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 1 to 6 2
94. EAD instruction can be checked CPU module Simple Motion module Target station Command Word device H ReaD Word device Writes data in the device of another station In units of words For the SWRITE instruction when data write is completed the other station s device is turned on It can be confirmed that data was written to the other station by the SWRITE instruction CPU module Simple Motion module Target station Word device Command HHwrite 10 2 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Instruction Description Reads data from the buffer memory in the target station In units of words CPU module Simple Motion module Target station Command HREMF Buffer memory hehe Channel 32 CPU module Command HHRemro Note 1 Execute it on the master station b Transient transmission range of the link dedicated instruction e Single network system It is possible to communicate with all stations on the network 10 3 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 2 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 10 2 1 Precautions for dedicated instructions common The following describes precautions when using dedicated instructions 1 When changing data specified by dedicated instructions Do not change any data e g control data until execution of the dedicated instruction is completed 2 When the dedicated instruction is not completed Check whether the mode of the
95. F 64 0040 007 _J a master Local Module sil P El Head Module A MA 10726F1 Head Module pa Configuration gt of the devices El CCIE Field Configuration Module 1 Start I O 0000 CCIE Field Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting telo ca Ss x RS Servo Ampliter MELSERVO 4 S El Basic Digital Input Module El Basic Digital Output Module El Basic Analog Input Module Basic Analog Output Module El Basic temperature control modi _ i 1 rutina 1 Icc ink IE Field Network Head Module ees n CC Link IE Field Network otai STAS s L rer laer Drag and drop the text D f 2 2 4 MN A a Manufacturer Name E Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Station Type Supplementary Information ds di Refresh devices that are assigned to multiple device ranges will appear in light blue Please refer to the following supplementary information for the device range content formation Supplementary Information EJ Output Chapter 7_ PARAMETER SETTING a Setting the configuration of the slave station in the master station Setting range If the value outside the setting range is set Parameter n Online Normal Mode Set the mode of the master station Refer to Section f error error code Mode Setting Offline 7
96. Field Network lle register cid SUBI E Be X Y M L F V B T ST C D W kO HO s Note 1 For bit data a bit specified word device can be used For example Word device Bit No is used for the bit specification of a word device The bit number is specified in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is specified by D0 A However bit specification cannot be used for timer T retentive timer ST and counter C For details on each device refer to the following User s Manual for the CPU module used Function Explanation Program Fundamentals The following data types are available Data type Description Bit data or the start number of bit data BIN 16 bit 16 bit binary data or the start number of word device BIN 32 bit 32 bit binary data or the start number of double word device BCD 4 digit Four digit binary coded decimal data BCD 8 digit Eight digit binary coded decimal data Floating point data Character string Character string data Device name Device name data Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 4 JP GP READ Reading Data from Another Station This instruction reads data from the device on another station In units of words JP READ S1 GP READ Available devices Setting data Internal device Fil Link direct device Intelligent function Ind ist tae Note 1 ile ndex register Note 1 System user JOO module device i Others F register Bit Word CaA Start contact
97. Field Network status graphically The CC Link IE Field Network status can be checked using GX Works2 Error locations error causes and event history are displayed on the window This allows the system to quickly recover from errors Refer to Chapter 9 CCIE Field Diagnostics Ma Mode Module Network No Chenge Module SEK StatonNo t7Ero if a poo eras ys Pa ERP de ME I Menee seton eo EERIE B m o Chapter 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK 7 Adding CC Link IE Field Network devices without stopping the system a Adding CC Link IE Field Network devices CC Link IE Field Network devices whose parameters have not been set can be added without powering off the system Refer to the user s Manual of the head module Connection of an added module can be recognized and setting a station No on the window allows tentative operation Set Station No es MAC Address of select station en Teel ds Station No for setting 18 OK Cancel Chapter 2_ NAMES OF EACH PART Chapter 2 NAMES OF EACH PART 2 1 Names of Each Part ia a 2 2 Chapter 2_ NAMES OF EACH PART 2 1 Names of Each Part This chapter describes the names of each part of the Simple Motion module QD77GF16 QD77GF16 RUN SD ERR PULSER O O CC Link IE Bien Zn
98. H Flash ROM failure i e Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D827H Communication RAM failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures DAOOH to DAO1H_ Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures DA10H to DA18H Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures DADOH to DAD4H Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative 12 23 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING A
99. JPREAD f l Start contact GP READ f m MEME a in H ae eel E DE D2 Note 1 Local devices and file registers set for each program cannot be used Note 2 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used Note 3 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU a digit specified bit device can be used Example K4M16 To use digit specification the following conditions must be satisfied The device number should be multiples of 16 10H The number of digits should be 4 K4 1 Setting data Setting data Setby Data type Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access 16 bit binary User Start device of the own station where control data is stored Refer to Section 10 4 1 a Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored Refer to Section 10 4 1 b Device name Start device of the own station where read data is stored D1 A continuous area for the read data length is required Refer to Section 10 4 1 c Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan D2 upon completion of the instruction D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails S2 10 8 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a Control data Setting data Setting range Set by b15 to b7 to bO po Mo x Abnormal end 0001H type 1 Abnormal end type bit 7 0081H User Specify the s
100. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSECL MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual wey ET Coes QD77GF16 MODEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS O Please read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only Refer to the user s manual of the CPU module to use for a description of the PLC system safety precautions In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous i NM DAN G E R conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous AN CAU T O N conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage re a a A amme a as s a as am a a s aD amS Depending on circumstances procedures indicated by A CAUTION may also be linked to serious results In any case it is important to follow the directions for usage Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user For Safe Operations 1 Prevention of electric shocks Z DANGER Never open the front case or terminal covers while the power is ON or the unit is running as this may lead to electri
101. N Flashing Frame error Sending data Data not sent operation cyclic transmission in operation cyclic transmission Data link not disconnected Receiving data Data not received Frame error not O OFF Chapter 2_ NAMES OF EACH PART 2 CC Link IE Field Network connector section CC Link IE Bie ED LER LINK LED Display LER E L ER LED is ON Receive data error LINK O O L ER LED is OFF O PINS EE Linkup in progress ON p In prog LINK LED is Linkdown in progress LON O OFF Receive data operates normally Chapter 3_ SPECIFICATIONS Chapter 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 General Specifications oooooonnocinnccinnncnnnnnnnconncrcnnnrncnnncnnnncn corro cnn cnn rra nn 3 2 3 2 Performance Specifications ooooooonnnccnnndnnnnconnconocccnocccnnnccnnnrnnnrcnnnrn nn 3 2 3 3 FUNCION List 21 aa a a eee eee 3 3 3 4 Specifications of Input Output Signals with CPU Module oooococconocconoccciocccincccccnccnnnos 3 5 3 4 1 List of input output signals with CPU module oooooocncocincccnocccccccconccconrccnnncnnnnos 3 5 3 4 2 Details of input signals QD77GF CPU module neess 3 6 3 5 Buffer Memory Network Function ccccecceeceseceeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeseneseeeseeeseeeseneeeeeeaaes 3 7 Chapter 3_ SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications function list l O signal and buffer memory of the Simple Motion m
102. N I Identical Point Assignmenk 64 Point Y Identical Point Set in increments of 16 points Points entered in this field will be reflected to the Points of RX RY Setting Half of the points entered in this field will be reflected to the Points of RWw RWr Setting 3 Setting example For setting examples refer to Chapter 11 Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 5 Network Operation Settings Set operating status of a network if a data link error occurs or the CPU module is set to STOP 1 Set network setting parameters Refer to Section 7 3 2 Open the setting window in GX Works2 Project window Parameter Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Network Operation Settings button 3 Set parameters in the window Network Operation Settings Parameter Name Output Setting During CPU STOP rT Hold Clear ALL OFF Data Link Faulty Station Setting 6 fun OFF or 0 Clear Input Data RX RY Hold Input Data RX RY Setting range Enter the name of network operation setting Parameter Name Up to 8 characters parameters if desired e Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input Data Select whether to hold or clear data input from the RX RY TE Data Link Faulty Station All invalid for the slave station No 17 to 120 where a data link error has Hold Input Data Setting station No 1 to 16 occurred Refer to Section 8 3 5 Default Turn OFF or O Clear Input Data RX RY S
103. Name QD77GF 16 No Error Code Date and Time Model Name StartI O Start 1 0 0000 00008 Cs 2013 12 18 13 51 05 QD77GF16 Pee Pye 00010 0323 2013 12 18 14 09 43 QD77GF16 0000 00013 0323 2013 12 18 14 36 25 QD77GF16 0000 Error and Solution intelligent Module Information 00016 0323 2013 12 18 14 40 48 QD77GF16 0000 00007 osDC 2013 12 18 13 51 03 QO3UDVCPU Explanation 00012 05D 2013 12 18 14 36 23 QO3UDVCPU 00015 osDC 2013 12 18 14 40 47 QO3UDVCPU PLC CPU module error 00018 osoc 2013 12 18 14 44 21 QO3UDVCPU 3 The CPU module resulted in an error 00019 ospc 2013 12 18 15 23 00 QO3UDVCPU 00020 05DC 2013 12 19 10 12 59 QO3UDVCPU e X 00021 o5DC 2013 12 19 10 16 36 QO3UDVCPU ane 00022 05DC 2013 12 19 10 38 49 QO3UDVCPU 00017 0898 2013 12 18 14 40 49 QO3UDVCPU Check the error code in CPU module 00009 ocic 2013 12 18 13 51 07 QO3UDVCPU 00011 oc 2013 12 18 14 09 44 QOZUDVCPU 00014 oc4e 2013 12 18 14 36 25 QO3UDVCPU 00001 D81A 0000 00 00 00 00 00 QD77GF16 0000 A 00002 D81A 0000 00 00 00 00 00 QJ71GF11 T2 0020 00003 D81A 0000 00 00 00 00 00 QD77GF16 0000 gt Clear History Refresh Create CSV Elle Close If data link cannot be performed even after the above operation is performed perform the following e Checking for error using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to Chapter 9 e Checking the LEDs Refer to Section 12 3 e Troubleshooting by symptom Refer to Section 12 4
104. OM PLC diagnostic error history and system error history by POWER OFF RESET 11 7 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING X Intelligent device station Station No 17 Open the PLC parameter window and set parameters as follows Project window Parameter PLC Parameter Communication Head Setting Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 3 Add the D A converter module L60DA4 to the GX Works2 project Project window Intelligent Function Module right click New Module m Module Selection Module Type Analog Module 5 Module Name sonas y Mount Position Base No F z Mounted Slot No fo a Acknowledge I O Assignment IV Specify start XY address 0000 H 1Module Occupy 16 points Title setting Title _x cms 4 Open the switch setting window for the D A converter module L60DA4 and set parameters as follows Project window Intelligent Function Module L60DA4 Switch Setting Drive Mode Setting Normal D A Converter Processing Mode y Output mode setting Normal output mode conversion speed 20us CH y Output mode setting is available for product information 140410000000000 A or later Following operations are required to run the system under Wave output mode 1 Create wave output data 2 Write the created data to buffer memory by means of FB library This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter D
105. QD77GF MELSEC Q L QD77MS QD77GF LD77MS LD77MH Simple Motion Module User s Manual Synchronous Functions programming and buffer memory for the Control synchronous control of the Simple Motion module lt IB 0300174 1XB943 gt MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Overview of CC Link IE Field Network and specifications Network procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the MELSEC Q series Simple Motion lt IB 0300203 1XB957 gt module 2 CC Link IE Field Network Manual name att Description lt manual number model code gt MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module Overview of CC Link IE Field Network and specifications User s Manual procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the MELSEC Q series master local lt SH 080917ENG 13JZ47 gt module MELSEC QS CC Link IE Field Network Overview of CC Link IE Field Network and specifications Master Local Module User s Manual procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the MELSEC QS series master local lt SH 080969ENG 13JZ53 gt module MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module Specifications procedures before operation system User s Manual configuration installation wiring settings and lt
106. REMTO instruction is executed the execution status is stored in Execution status REMFR REMTO SW0080 to SWOO9F SWO001A Number of resends REMFR REMTO Swo001B Response wait timer REMFR REMTO SW0080 to Execution status REMFR REMTO SWO09F b Common link dedicated instructions except the REMFR and REMTO instructions Processing results of link dedicated instructions can be checked using Send receive instruction 1 processing result SW0030 for channel 1 and Send receive instruction 2 processing result SW0031 for channel 2 SW0030 Send receive instruction 1 processing result SW0031 Send receive instruction 2 processing result 11 22 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 9 Canceling restoring reserved station setting Canceling restoring reserved station setting is executed using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics as well as link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs Refer to Section 9 6 a Canceling reserved station setting 1 Specify the station number to cancel reserved station setting in Reserved station function disable setting SW0011 to SW0017 2 Turn on Reserved station function disable request SB0012 3 Reserved station function disable request accept status SB005C is turned on 4 When reserved station setting is cancelled Reserved station function disable completion status SB005D turns on 5 Reserved station function disable status SB0180 is turned on and the station
107. RODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCT s are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series
108. Refer to Section 8 3 3 1 b Write The range that satisfies all of the following conditions can be specified e Area where data is sent to other stations and outside the link refresh range Refer to Section 8 3 1 e Within the link device range of the Simple Motion module Refer to Section 8 3 3 1 Example CPU module Simple Motion module Y RY Link refresh Area where data is sent This area is Outside the to other stations writable link refresh range Link refresh Area for receiving from other stations Chapter8 FUNCTIONS When writing data to the area in the link refresh range directly access the link device and write the same data in the device of the CPU module Bad example Only direct access to the link refresh target a RWw100 Link refresh f overwrites the value Good example In addition to direct access writing the same data to the CPU module device CPU module Simple Motion module mov K20 J1 W100 MOV k20 W100 Write the same data The value written by to the CPU module link direct access is reflected Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 3 Differences from link refresh Access method Item Link refresh Number of steps Processing speed LD BO ia High speed 0 0095us Low speed 10 to 100us sa Station based or 32 bit units Data reliability Note 3 Note 1 The given value is for the QQGUDEHCPU Note 2 When Block Data Assurance
109. S2 3000 Cy MD r I s 1 Simple Motion module i Channel 1 f A i y 1 Write data storage device Device specified in D1 Head module P D1 1 Write notification device i Device specified in D3 10 36 Own station CPU Simple Motion module 3 4 When failed I I I I i Sequence scan I i Start contact I i Completion device Device specified in D2 i Completion status indication device A Device of D2 1 Write data storage device Device specified in S2 Completion status Device of S1 1 E ence ea mC Se ee Error Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS ENDF 0 END 0 ENDF70 ENDF 0 END 3000 CD Target station error When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Works2 Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to Chapter 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D2 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 of the control data According to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action Refer to Section 12 5 Program example Just like the WRITE instruction program example this program example is for writing data of D750 to D753 of station No 0 own station into W300 to W303 of station No 18 target station when M112 is turned on Furthermore when the w
110. SW0011 32 SW0012 48 SW0013 64 SW0014 80 SW0015 96 SW0016 112 Each number in the table represents station No Conditions For some stations reserved station setting cannot be temporarily canceled restored Refer to Section 9 6 e Stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Specifies the number of resends for the REMFR REMTO instruction 0 0 times default Outside the above Number of times that is set Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Specifies the response wait time for the REMFR REMTO instruction 0 10 seconds default Outside the above Number of seconds that is set Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Appendix 17 Appendices Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used the own station s channel 1 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion Refer to Section 12 5 SW0030 SW0031 Send receive instruction 1 processing result Send receive instruction 2 processing result Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used the own station s channel 2 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion Refer to Section 12 5 Stores the network number of own station SW0040 Network No Range 1 to 239 Stores the station number of own s
111. WO1FF e Do not write any data to an area whose number is not on the link special register SW list Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system e For the usage of the link special register SW refer to Section 11 3 Appendix 16 Appendices SW0000 SWO0002 to SW0008 Swo011 to SW0017 SWO01A SW001B Link stop start direction Reserved station function disable setting Number of resends REMFR REMTO Response wait timer REMFR REMTO Sets the station where cyclic transmission is stopped or started 02H Specified station 82H Specified station Forced link start Stopping starting of cyclic transmission is performed by System link start SB0002 or System link stop SB0003 When Specified station 02H or 82H is selected the own station is not included When setting 02H or 82H by the Link stop start direction SW0000 this sets the station No that stops or starts cyclic transmission 0 No direction issued for stop or start 1 Direction issued for stop or start b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 SW0002 32 SW0003 48 SW0004 64 SW0005 80 SW0006 96 SWO0007 112 Each number in the table represents station No Specify the slave station for which the reserved station setting is to be temporary canceled restored 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3
112. a oleae e a sa s 2 4 ncnronous 7 swo1co 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 SW01C8 asynchronous i swo1ca 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 to operation status A ce swo1cB 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Information eac lo swo1cc 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 station swo1CD 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 swo1ce 112 1111110 109 108 107 106 105 104 108 102 101 100 99 98 97 SWO1CF 1201119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Appendix 27 Appendices Appendix 4 Processing Time The processing time of CC Link IE Field Network consists of the time components below Sequence scan Link refresh time Link scan time Slave station processing time Transmission delay time module station station Device Link device Link device ua 7 External device Processing time of slave station A External device e Sequence scan Refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used e Link refresh time Refer to Appendix 4 1 e Link scan time Refer to Appendix 4 2 Slave station processing time Refer to the manual for the slave station used e Transmission delay time Refer to Appendix 4 3 Appendix 28 Appendices Appendix 4 1 Link refresh time The fo
113. ample the SREAD instruction program example has a different section where the read notification device D3 is specified at the end of the arguments Refer to Section 10 4 4 a System configuration Same as the READ instruction program example b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB link special register SW Same as the READ instruction program example e Devices used by users The devices used in the SREAD instruction request source station No 0 are the same as those in the READ instruction program example Devices used in the SREAD instruction request destination station No 17 Y107 Read notification device Read completion device c SREAD instruction setting Same as the READ instruction program example 10 20 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d Program example e Program example in SREAD instruction request source station No 0 M100 i MOV H81 D200 MOV K1 D202 MOV HO D203 MOV K1 D204 MOV K17 D205 Control data setting for SREAD instruction MOV KO D206 MOV KO D208 MOV K5 D209 MOV KO D210 M101 SB47 SWOA1 0 1 AF AF MOV K5 D207 Ea J1 D200 W250 D700 M105 Y107 Execution of M105 M106 a ii OEE a SREAD instruction h 1 Processing program upon completion be ww ww www ewww eee e cece cecccseccccccsesesesesesess dJ M106 E RS O 7 E t Processing program upon failure 10 21 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 6 JP GP WRITE Writi
114. aneously connecting disconnecting Ethernet cables to from multiple stations When a data link faulty station returns a data link error will occur in all Line topology the stations e Disconnecting more than nine stations or half the number of slave stations or more in the system e Changing the network topology when adding a slave station Instantaneous fault on all stations 0000 9000 gogo 9000 0000 0000 Insertion removal or power OFF ON To hold the outputs as a measure when a data link error occurs configure the following settings Simple Motion module Set that the input data from the data link faulty station is held Project window Parameter Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Network Operation Settings button For a head module whose serial number first five digits is 12071 or earlier Set that the output data when a data link error occurs is held Project window Parameter PLC Parameter I O Assignment gt Detailed Setting button Error Time Output Mode This setting is not required for a head module whose serial number first five digits is 12072 or later Chapter 5_ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION d Connected station numbers Do not duplicate station numbers Data link may be stopped when the station number is duplicated X Duplication X Station No 0 Station No 17 Station No 17 Station No 18
115. annns 11 15 121 Before Troubleshooting orenen En R EE at 12 2 12 2 Troubleshooting Procedure cecccecceeceeeneeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateaeeeeeseesas 12 2 12 3 Checking the LEDS ocio didn diene 12 7 12 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 0 0 ecceceeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteeeeeaeseaeeaeseaeseaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeatesueeeieeeaeesas 12 9 12 4 1 Cyclic transmission Cannot be performed ceceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaeseneseneseateaes 12 9 12 4 2 Transient transmission cannot be performed cccccceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeseaeeseeeeeeueeeeiaeeseaeeses 12 10 12 4 3 Station is disconnected from the Network ccsccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeseaeesseeeesueeeeeneeseaeeaes 12 10 12 4 4 Station is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected eecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeateas 12 10 12 4 5 Communication is UNStable cececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeneecaeeseaeeesaeeecaneeseneeseaeessaeeesieesieeeeiseetaas 12 10 12 5 Error Code List DOOOH to DFFFH 2 ccccccccescceseceeceneeeeeeeeeeceeceneeseaeeseueeseaceeseneeeeneessaeeeeeeesneeeeans 12 11 12 6 Checking the Status by System Monitor ec ceceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeeneeeaeenas 12 25 Appendix 1 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses 2 cc cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaceeeeneeecaeeesaeeesineesenetaes Appendix 2 Appendix
116. are ignored Stores the station number receiving an error frame on the transmission path at each station s PORT1 0 A line error has not yet occurred on the transmission path of each station s PORT1 1 A line error has occurred on the transmission path of each station s PORT1 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored status is cleared b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 swo120 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 13 2 1 SW0121 swot22 Swo0120 PORT error frame 8W0123 to reception status each statio Wot 96 95 90 89 88 87 86 SW0126 112 111 106 105 104 103 102 120 119 118 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Holds the data immediately before the error This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWODAO to SWO00A7 Appendix 24 Appendices Stores the station number receiving an error frame on the transmission path at each station s PORT2 0 A line error has not yet occurred on the transmission path of each station s PORT2 1 A line error has occurred on the transmission path of each station s PORT2 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored status is cleared b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 swo130 16 15 14 1
117. as ICs or the connector contacts Before touching the module always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction 0 Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts and electronic components Touching them could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module Do not place the module or servo amplifier on metal that may cause a power leakage or wood plastic or vinyl that may cause static electricity buildup Do not perform a megger test insulation resistance measurement during inspection When replacing the module or servo amplifier always set the new module settings correctly Z CAUTION When the module or absolute value motor has been replaced carry out a home position return operation using one of the following methods otherwise position displacement could occur 1 After writing the servo data to the Simple Motion module using programming software switch on the power again then perform a home position return operation O After maintenance and inspections are completed confirm that the position detection of the absolute position detector function is correct Do not drop or impact the battery installed to the module Doing so may damage the battery causing battery liquid to leak in the battery Do not use the dropped or impacted battery but dispose of it 0 Do not short circuit charge overheat incinerate or d
118. ative Correct the request command at the request source and retry the Transient data request error f operation e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool Transient reception failed e When the target station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data send the data to the target relay station after the load on the station is reduced e Once pausing the transient transmission and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation 7 e Use the COM instruction to increase the frequency of transient Receive queue full El transmission e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Transient transmission failed of the programming tool e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation Execution module error Correct the execution module at the SLMP header and retry the operation 12 17 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool Receive buffer full e When the target station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data send the data to the target relay station after the load on the station is reduced e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation Send buffer full
119. bishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd CC Link IE Field Network cable e Cable types The following cable types are available depending on the operating environment e Standard type Cables for inside the control panel and indoor connection e L type Cables for outdoor connection Cables and relay adapters of flame retardant or waterproof type are also available Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd 5 2 2 Hubs Use the recommended product shown below Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs other than the recommended product are used Number of Manufacturer Model name i maximum extension Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd DT135TX Chapter 5_ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 3 Applicable Systems For the MELSEC Q series systems that include the Simple Motion module refer to MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control Chapter 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Chapter 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 1 Installation ANd Wiring 2 cece eeeeeee cence eeee eee eee seesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesieeseesieeseesieesieeteeeaees 6 2 Chapter 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 1 Installation and Wiring For the installation and wiring of the Simple Motion module refer to the MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 1 Parameter and Backup cccccceesceeeeeeee
120. c shocks Never run the unit with the front case or terminal cover removed The high voltage terminal and charged sections will be exposed and may lead to electric shocks Never open the front case or terminal cover at times other than wiring work or periodic inspections even if the power is OFF The insides of the module and servo amplifier are charged and may lead to electric shocks Completely turn off the externally supplied power used in the system before mounting or removing the module performing wiring work or inspections Failing to do so may lead to electric shocks When performing wiring work or inspections turn the power OFF wait at least ten minutes and then check the voltage with a tester etc Failing to do so may lead to electric shocks Be sure to ground the module servo amplifier and servomotor Ground resistance 100 Q or less Do not ground commonly with other devices The wiring work and inspections must be done by a qualified technician Wire the units after installing the module servo amplifier and servomotor Failing to do so may lead to electric shocks or damage Never operate the switches with wet hands as this may lead to electric shocks Do not damage apply excessive stress place heavy things on or sandwich the cables as this may lead to electric shocks Do not touch the module servo amplifier servomotor connector or terminal blocks while the power is ON as this may lead to electric sho
121. cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D019H to DO1AH Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative DO30H to DO33H Connection failure Correct the wiring D035H Connection failure Correct the wiring A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool If the number of slave stations per network is more than 120 reduce it to 120 or less Incorrect number of stations Check the first five digits of the serial number of the station which becomes the next course of the error detection If the module does not support the used function replace it with the module with the latest version SLMP function non correspondence A malfunction
122. ce Code enter a Value word device value that triggers an interrupt Channel No Connection __ No This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module Refer to the next table Enter an interrupt SI number used in Interrupt Pointer Setting of the PLC parameter window Refer to Section 7 7 3 Interrupt SI No An interrupt SI number is a management number assigned to each Simple Motion module This number is required when the Simple Motion module sends an interrupt request to the CPU module Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Setting range Device Device a Word Device Channel Interrupt Detection Method Interrupt Condition 2 Code No Setting Value No Connection No SI No RX OH to Level Detect and ON Interrupt occurs by turning 1FFFH _ jon the device Sy OH to Level Detect and OFF Interrupt occurs by turning off 1FFFH _ the device Edge Detect and ON Interrupt occurs at the rising OH to edge of the device E 1FFH Edge Detect and OFF Interrupt occurs at the falling edge of the device B Level Detect and Equal Interrupt occurs when 3FFH values match Level Detect and Unequal Interrupt occurs when RWW H values do not match 0 to 65535 Edge Detect and Equal Interrupt occurs when values OH to FFFFH OH to match first time only PW 1FFH Edge Detect and Unequal Interrupt occurs when values do not match first time only RECVS This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion mod
123. ce name A continuous area for the read data length is required Number of read points 1 to 240 words 16 bit binary Device of the own station turned on for 1 scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails The start address of the buffer memory of the intelligent device station remote device station where data to be read 10 39 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Function a REMEFR instruction overview The instruction reads data by the specified number of words n5 from the start address n4 of the buffer memory of the intelligent device station remote device station into the own station word devices after D1 Specify the target stations in setting data Jn Jn n2 and n3 When the reading of data is completed the completion device D2 turns on Own station Target station CPU module Simple Motion Head module Intelligent module function module Devi Buffer memor D1 cida Channel 1 n4 EME i n5 d Channel n words Channel 32 b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following Refer to Section 10 1 1 c Checking the execution status of an REMFR instruction The execution status completion or error of the REMFR instruction can be checked using the following device specified for the setting data e Completion device D2 It is turned on in
124. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteneeeees 10 8 10 5 JP GP SREAD Reading Data from Another Station 0 ccceseereeeesteeeeenaes 10 16 10 6 JP GP WRITE Writing Data to Another Station 0 0 cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeees 10 22 10 7 JP GP SWRITE Writing Data to Another Station ececseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeees 10 33 10 8 ZP REMFR Reading Data from the Intelligent Device Station Remote Device Station 10 39 10 9 ZP REMTO Writing Data to the Intelligent Device Station Remote Device Station 10 44 10 1 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions facilitate programming for using intelligent function modules This chapter describes dedicated instructions that can be used in the Simple Motion modules 10 1 List of Dedicated Instructions The following describes dedicated instructions that can be used in the Simple Motion modules and their transmission range 1 Link dedicated instructions These instructions are used for transient transmission to or from other stations Each link dedicated instruction allows access to a station on a network other than CC Link IE Field Network excluding the REMFR and REMTO instructions a List of dedicated instructions Instruction Description Reads data from the device of another station In units of words For the SREAD instruction when data read is completed the device on the other station is turned on Data reading from the other station by the SR
125. ceived from power on until the present at each station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT2 error frame detection each station SW0150 to SW0157 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of PORT2 error frame detection each station SW0150 to SW0157 may be offset by one sequence scan PORT2 error frame SB0150 detection each station Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the parameter status for each station OFF No parameter errors for any stations ON Parameter error detected at one or more stations If a parameter error occurs the status of each station can be checked by the Parameter error Parameter error status status each station SW0170 to SW0177 each station Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Parameter error status each station SW0170 to SW0177 may be offset by one sequence scan SB0170 Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored This stores if a reserved station function is disabled OFF No disabled reserved station function ON Disabled reserved station function found id cies If a reserved station func
126. ch number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Stores the synchronous asynchronous communication operation status for each station 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 SW01C8 Synchronous asynchronous operation status information SW01CF each station SW01CE 112 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 Cyclic Transmission Data communication is available periodically among stations on the same network Link devices RX RY RWr and RWw are used 8 3 1 Data flow and link device assignment One to one communication is possible between the Simple Motion module master station and the connected device of the station No 17 to 120 The status information of the link devices RY and RWw of the master station is output to the connected device of the station No 17 to 120 and the input status information from the connected device of the station No 17 to 120 is stored in the link devices RX and RWr of the master station The connected devices of the station No 1 to 16 are controlled by the Simple Motion module It cannot communicate with the link devices of the Simple Motion module eo oooooooooooooooooooo CPU Simple Motion module module Station No 1 Station Station
127. cial registers SWs of the master station Refer to Section 11 3 b Setting a station as a reserved station again 1 Open the Reserved Station Function Enable window in the same way as described in 2 a 2 In Reserved Station List click the number of the target station The text turns red and the background turns light blue Only stations not specified as a reserved station can be selected The background of available modules is orange Reserved Station Function Enable Temporarily enable reserved stations Reserved stations can not be enabled from local stations if the selected station is a local station sub master station sub master operation t is only possible to view the list of reserved stations Enabled reserved stations will remain active until the master station sub master station master operation is tumed OFF or reset At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station Lif is ig 3 Click the OK button Legend Operation Method 57 Reserved Station 157 Reserved Station 15 Reserved Station No Setting IB Unassigned station number Function Disable Not Selectable Not selectable Operation Method o 1 Set a station to reserved station errors by clicking the appropriate station number box 2 Click the apply OK button to reflect the changes a Reserved Station 15
128. cking cable is connected in a redundant System B CPU i system Control system CPU A CPU module that controls operations in a redundant system Standby system CPU A CPU module that stands by in case the control system fails in a redundant system A CPU module that controls connected I O modules and intelligent function modules In a Control CPU multiple CPU system there are multiple CPU modules and each connected module can be controlled by a different CPU module GX Works2 The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers CC Link IE Field Network A high speed and large capacity open field network that is based on Ethernet 1000BASE T CC Link A field network system where data processing for control and information can be Li simultaneously performed at high speed Simple Motion module The abbreviation for the QD77GF16 CC Link IE Field Network Simple Motion module Head module The abbreviation for the LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network head module thernet adapter module The abbreviation for the NZ2GF ETB CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CC Link IE Field Network interface board The abbreviation for the Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network interface board A generic term for the following modules e CC Link IE Field Network module e CC Link IE Controller Network module Ethernet interface module MELSECNET H module e MELSECNET 10 module Intelligent function A MELSEC Q L series
129. cks Do not touch the built in power supply built in grounding or signal wires of the module and servo amplifier as this may lead to electric shocks 2 For fire prevention CAUTION Install the module servo amplifier servomotor and regenerative resistor on incombustible Installing them directly or close to combustibles will lead to fire O if a fault occurs in the module or servo amplifier shut the power OFF at the servo amplifier s power source If a large current continues to flow fire may occur When using a regenerative resistor shut the power OFF with an error signal The regenerative resistor may abnormally overheat due to a fault in the regenerative transistor etc and may lead to fire Always take heat measures such as flame proofing for the inside of the control panel where the servo amplifier or regenerative resistor is installed and for the wires used Failing to do so may lead to fire Do not damage apply excessive stress place heavy things on or sandwich the cables as this may lead to fire 3 For injury prevention Z CAUTION Do not apply a voltage other than that specified in the instruction manual on any terminal Doing so may lead to destruction or damage Do not mistake the terminal connections as this may lead to destruction or damage Do not mistake the polarity as this may lead to destruction or damage Do not touch the heat radiating fins of module or servo amplifie
130. converter module L60DA4 When X21 is turned on an analog value is output from the D A converter module L60DA4 When X24 is turned on the warning output is cleared When an error occurs in the D A converter module L60DA4 an error code is output in BCD notation from the output module QY10 of the master station When X25 is turned on an error clear request is sent to the D A converter module L60DA4 11 13 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 2 Program example of station error detection A stop error in the head module does not cause a stop error in the master station s CPU module If a stop error occurs in the head module the master station is notified when the bit that corresponds to the head module s station number turns on in Operation status each station SW0100 to SW0117 of the master station To stop the entire system create a program as follows and set the master station s CPU module to STOP a Link special relay SB link special register SW Data link status each station station SB0049 Data link status own station SWO00B1 0 No 17 Operation status each station 1 station No 17 SW0101 0 b Devices used by the user No Nesting station No 17 MO Communication condition establishment flag station No 17 Fo Ammunciator when an error occurs in the head module station No 17 c Program example This program detects a stop error in station No 17 and sets the master station s CPU module STOP
131. ct and Unequal 0 to 65535 1 Setting method Set the interrupt request in the interrupt settings Refer to Section 7 7 Chapter 9 _CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 9 1 Diagnostic aMSN A A A A 9 2 9 2 Starting DIAgNostiCS ccoo a a daa idad 9 4 9 3 Diagnostic WiIndOW ccceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeseesaeseneseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseneseeeeeneeaes 9 8 9 4 Link Start Stop incita id dia 9 16 9 5 Network Event HiStOrY o ooonccnncnnnconnnnnconnconcnncnncanrcanrcnrcn rc 9 19 9 6 Reserved Station Function Enable cccecccecseceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseaeseeeeeaeeaes 9 22 9 7 Remote Operation ccccccceccccesceeeeceeeeneeceneeeeaeeceaceeeaneeseneeceneeeeaeeseaceesneeseneeeeeeesineesens 9 26 Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS This chapter describes how to check error locations error causes and event history using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostic function of GX Works2 With this function the status of other stations can also be monitored 9 1 Diagnostic Items The following table lists items that can be diagnosed by the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics when GX Works2 is connected to the Simple Motion module The diagnostic items differ depending on the station to which GX Works2 is connected cc Diagnostics E Tiy BB Monitor status K F Select Module ile 1 Network No 1 Change Module Stati
132. ct connections will lead the servomotor to operate abnormally Do not connect a commercial power supply to the servomotor as this may lead to trouble Do not mistake the direction of the surge absorbing diode installed on the DC relay for the control signal output of brake signals etc Incorrect installation may lead to signals not being output when trouble occurs or the protective functions not functioning Servo amplifier Servo amplifier 24VDC Control output Control output signal signal DICOM DICOM For the sink output interface For the source output interface Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit the encoder cable or PLC expansion cable while the power is ON Securely tighten the cable connector fixing screws and fixing mechanisms Insufficient fixing may lead to the cables combing off during operation Do not bundle the power line or cables Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure 0 Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise O Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malf
133. d Station Parameter error The slave station is reserved for future expansion _ No Setting error code By reserving a slave station link device assignment Reserved Station D301H will will not change even if the slave station is added or Default Blank occur the reservation is cancelled Therefore the program All invalid for the needs not to be modified Physical connection of the station No 1 to slave station is not required 16 e Error Invalid Station This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module These items cannot be set for the Simple Motion All invalid module Set Link Scan Mode Setting Loopback Function Setting Block Data Assurance per Station and Operation Setting for Returning Reserved Error Invalid Station CCIE Field Supplementary Setting Block Data Assurance per Station a fissure Block Data e Link Scan Mode Setting All invalid e Loopback Function Setting Block Data All invalid Assurance per Supplementary Setting 1 Link Scan Mode Setting Station is a button This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion Block Data Assurance per Station function for the module Selected Assure Block Data not station No 17 to 2 Loopback Function Setting selected 120 This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion Default Selected module Operation Setting for Returning 3 Block Data Assurance per Station All invalid Select whether to assure data integrit
134. d in a CSV file 1 Click the Create CSV File button in the Network Event History window and save the event history data in a CSV file Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 Network Event History List Detaled Information Event history contents 2 mem Information 2013 12 19 09 11 19 AM cal Baton pass status Normal 0838 2013 12 19 09 11 17 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down Cause of baton pass interrup Normal communica 0837 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data ink status 0836 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0835 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0834 2013 12 18 15 22 59 Master Staton lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or lnk down 0833 2013 12 18 15 22 58 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0832 2013 12 18 14 48 48 Master Staton lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0831 2013 12 18 14 48 47 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0830 2013 12 18 14 48 45 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0829 2013 12 18 14 48 44 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0828 2013 12 18 14 47 56 Master
135. d operations of the Intelligent Function Module predefined protocol support function of intelligent function lt SH 080921ENG 13JU69 gt modules using GX Works2 5 Servo amplifier Manual Name D Description lt Manual number model code gt CC Link IE Field Network Interface with Motion This manual explains the I O signals parts names parameters start up procedure and others for CC Link IE Field Network interface AC servo amplifier with Motion MR J4 _B RJ010 and CC Link IE Field Network lt SH 030117 1CW810 gt interface unit MR J3 T10 MR J4 _B RJ010 MR J3 T10 Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION MW The symbols used in this manual are shown below The following symbols represent the buffer memories supported for each axis A serial No is inserted in the mark Symbol Ma Symbol that indicates monitor data item M Representation of numerical values used in this manual e Error codes X Y devices and link devices are represented in hexadecimal e Buffer memory addresses and setting data are represented in decimal or hexadecimal Data ended by H or h is represented in hexadecimal Example 10 Decimal 10H Hexadecimal TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms A CPU module where the system A connector of a tracking cable is connected in a redundant System A CPU system A CPU module where the system B connector of a tra
136. data can be stored Example When the area addressed D150 or higher of the own station CPU is already used Good example Bad example O D50 is specified in D1 x D100 is specified in D1 Own station CPU Other station Own station CPU Other station a DO a DO D50 r 100 words e 100 words 4 D149 or 2 D100 E di D150 D150 Q D199 EJ Data to be read with READ instruction CL Area already used by own station s CPU mi Duplicated area 10 11 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Function a READ instruction overview The instruction reads data by the specified number of words control data S1 9 from the target station start device S2 into the own station word devices after D1 Specify the target stations in control data S1 4 and S1 5 When the reading from devices of the target station is completed the completion device D2 turns on Own station Target station CPU module Simple Motion module Head module Channel 1 Channel 2 b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following Refer to Section 10 1 1 c Checking the execution status of the READ instruction The execution status completion or error of the READ instruction can be checked using the following device specified for the setting data e Completion device D2 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the READ in
137. data link faulty station Hold clear status setting for CPU STOP k SWO00C1 to 7 Reserved station setting status Reserved station setting status SW00C7 11 20 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 7 Checking CPU module status The CPU module status is checked using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics as well as link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs Refer to Chapter 9 a Checking the CPU module status other stations 1 Whether the CPU module is in RUN or STOP can be checked using the following link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs e CPU RUN status master station SBOOF 1 e When CPU RUN status each station SBOOFO is turned on check the station number using CPU RUN status each station SWOOFO to SWOOF7 2 A continuation error in the CPU module can be checked using the following link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs e CPU operation status master station 2 SB0111 e When CPU operation status each station 2 5B0110 is turned on check the station number using Operation status each station 2 SW0110 to SW0117 3 Astop error in the CPU module can be checked using the following link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs e CPU operation status master station 1 SB0101 e When CPU operation status each station 1 5B0100 is turned on check the station number using Operation status each station 1 SW0100 to SW0107 SWOOFO t
138. depending on the setting is available only when the slave station setting a set module supports the station specific mode Station specific mode The slave stations are listed Drag and drop the modules from Module List to the station list area or the device map area to set the information of the slave stations into the master station Module List b Change Transmission Path Method CC IE Field Configuration Change Transmission Path Method Change Transmission Path Method The transmission path method cannot be changed The ring e Line Star connection is not supported Default Line Star Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING c Supplementary Setting CC IE Field Configuration Supplementary Setting el CCIE Field Configuration Module 1 Start I O 0 CCIE Field Configuration Edit View Close Change Module gt Change Transmission Path Method Equal Assignment Identical Point Assignment 1 1 Check Online gt Close with Discarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Set Link Scan Mode Setting Loopback Function Setting Block Data Assurance per Station and Operation Setting for Returning i CCIE Field Supplementary Setting Block Data Assurance per Station i pesia Block Bata ESEE Link Scan Mode Setting All invalid e Loopback Function Setting All invalid Block Data e Block Data Assurance per A
139. device Device of D2 1 OFF I I Read data storage device Device specified in D1 O LS 100 I I I I 1 Channel 1 i 1 1 I i Read data storage device 1 Device specified in S2 Li 1 i Read notification device Device specified in D3 I I Li Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 ENDR 0 END Start contact Completion device Device specified in D2 Completion status indication device Device of D2 1 Completion status Device of S1 1 Channel 1 Target station error 10 19 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 Error When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Works2 Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to Chapter 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D2 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 of the control data According to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action Refer to Section 12 5 4 Program example Just like the READ instruction program example this program example is for reading data of W250 to W254 of station No 17 target station into D700 to D704 of station No 0 own station when M101 is turned on Furthermore when the read notification device D3 of the target station is turned on Y60 of the target station is turned on Compared to the READ instruction program ex
140. devices and file registers set for each program cannot be used Note 2 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used When specifying SD SW it can be written in the range that the user can set For details on SD SW refer to the following Manuals for the CPU module and network module of the target station For the SWRITE instruction the write notification device D3 can be omitted in the programming However the operation is the same as the WRITE instruction The SWRITE instruction can operate differently depending on whether the write notification device D3 is omitted or not Note 4 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU the data set in the write notification device D3 is ignored Operation is the same as the WRITE instruction Note 5 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU a digit specified bit device can be used Example K4M16 To use digit specification the following conditions must be satisfied The device number should be multiples of 16 10H The number of digits should be 4 K4 Note 3 10 33 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 Setting data Setting data Setby Data type Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access Start I O number of the Simple Motion module of the own 16 bit binary station 00 to FEH Upper 2 digits of the I O number expressed in S1 Start device of the own
141. direction valid while this relay is on SB0009 Event count clear This clears the Event history status SBO07A and Event count SW007A OFF No clear direction ON _ Clear direction Errors are not counted while this is ON SB000C Operation cycle interrupt request Used as the condition for the interrupt setting to execute an interrupt request to the CPU module in every operation cycle SB0012 Reserved station function disable request Stations specified in Reserved station function disable setting SW0011 to SW0017 are temporarily canceled from reserved stations OFF No request ON Request issued SB0013 Reserved station specification enable request Stations specified in Reserved station function disable setting SW0011 to SW0017 are returned to reserved stations Only stations that were temporarily canceled can be returned to reserved stations OFF No request ON _ Request issued SB0040 Network type own station Stores the network type of own station ON Field network SB0043 Mode own station Stores the mode of own station OFF Online ON_ Not online SB0044 Station setting own station 1 This stores if the own station is a master station or not OFF Not master station ON Master station SB0047 Baton pass status own station Stores the baton pass status for the own station transient transmission possible OFF Normal ON
142. displayed network Errors Detected Chapter 9 _CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Network Status Network map display area Displays the network map of CC Link IE Field Network and the status of each station If the status is not displayed check that there is only one master station in the system and no station number is overlapped 1 Icon The module type and station number are displayed with an icon 1 6 omecteds Click Selection se Master 0 Intelligent17 Intelligent 18 Double click Displays the System Monitor window 2 fal iE ma af Right click Executes debugging J Ly El keys on the keyboard Move the focus to the module to be diagnosed and determine it with the Space key Displays the network type and station number is displayed when a station number has not been set When the text s background is colored the relevant station may have been configured as a reserved station or an error invalid station Click the Legend button to check the meaning of the background colors Shows module status Click the Legend button to check the meaning of the icon If is displayed refer to If is displayed in Network Status and take corrective actions Refer to Section 9 3 2 4 Displays a port to which an eee cable is connected 2 Scaling If all stations are not displayed in this area enlarge or reduce the area by pressing the Lenf key and scrolling the wheel of a mouse T
143. dix 10 SB005D Reserved station function disable completion status Appendices Description Turns on when Reserved station function disable request accept status SB005C is turned on and disabling the reserved station function is completed OFF Not completed ON _ Completed or error completion SBO05E Reserved station specification enable request accept status Turns on when Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 is accepted OFF Not accepted ON _ Enable accepted SB005F Reserved station specification enabled status Turns on when Reserved station specification enable request accept status SB005E is turned on and the reserved station specification enable processing is completed OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion SB006A PORT1 linkup status own station Stores the linkup status of PORT1 own station OFF Linkup in progress ON Linkdown in progress The time that the linkup starts after power on or Ethernet cable connection may vary Normally it takes a few seconds Depending on device status on the line a linkup process is repeated resulting in the increase in the time SB006C PORT1 error frame reception status own station Stores if an error frame is received at the own station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON_ An error frame has been received SBOO6E PORT error frame detection own station Stores i
144. dule IV Collection of intelligent Function module error histories is valid Selecting this enables intelligent Function modules errors to be browsed in the Error History window of the system monitor Corresponding Memory System Memory bd History f Item 101 Collection No 1 Items Scan 1 100 b The time and date of the error is not correctly displayed If an error occurred during initial processing of the CPU module 0000 00 00 00 00 00 is displayed c The error code is not correctly displayed Instead of an error code HST LOSS may be displayed in the Error Code column if errors occurred at frequent intervals in the Simple Motion module Date and Time 2013 12 19 20 45 54 00092 0385 2013 12 19 20 45 54 QD77GF 16 0000 Error Code l If HST LOSS frequently appears increase the number of collected errors per scan in PLC RAS of the PLC parameter window Refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals of the CPU module in use d The same error code is not displayed again Ifthe same error continuously occurred only the first error is displayed in the Error History window 12 6 Chapter 12_ TROUBLESHOOTING 12 3 Checking the LEDs The following explains how to troubleshoot the system by the LEDs Refer to the MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control together 1 The D LINK LED turns off or is flashing Check item
145. e instruction instruction and retry the operation e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation D246H Incorrect transient data e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics D247H Dedicated instruction received of the programming tool twice e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation D248H Incorrect transient data e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative D249H Target station s CPU type error Correct the target station s CPU type at the request source of the dedicated instruction dedicated instruction and retry the operation Correct the arrival monitoring time at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation When the own station or target station detected an error identify the Arrival monitoring time error D24AH cause of the error and take action dedicated instruction ID e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly Correct the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation When the own station or
146. e on CC Link IE Field Network y Bit data input from a slave station to the master station Remote input RX Refer to Section 8 3 1 Bit data output from the master station to a slave station Remote output RY Refer to Section 8 3 1 r Word data input from a slave station to the master station Remote register RWr Refer to Section 8 3 1 Word data output from the master station to a slave station Remote register RWw i Refer to Section 8 3 1 Bit data that indicates the operating status and data link status of a module on CC Link IE Field Link special relay SB Network S f e Word data that indicates the operating status and data link status of a module on CC Link IE Link special register SW _ Field Network Link scan Link scan Link refresh Baton pass Buffer memory Buffer memory address Time required for all the stations on the network to transmit data The link scan time depends on data volume and the number of transient transmission requests Data transfer between a link device in a module on CC Link IE Field Network and a device ina CPU module Link refresh is performed in the END processing of the CPU module s sequence scan A token to send data over a network A memory in an intelligent function module where data such as setting values and monitoring values exchanged with a CPU module are stored An address that indicates the storage location of data assigned to the buffer memory in an
147. e setting is fixed to hold or clear depending on devices set to link refresh regardless of the output setting during CPU STOP The following table shows the relationship between the output status of the device set to link refresh and output setting during CPU STOP Output setting during CPU STOP Link refresh device Clear ALL OFF Yoo cea ear Other devices All devices where the output setting RWw Hold Hold during CPU STOP can be set 2 Setting method Set the output status for the case where the CPU module switch is set to STOP Select hold or clear in the Network Operation Settings window Refer to Section 7 5 5 z Network Operation Settings Parameter Name ie Output Setting During CPU STOP m Hold C Clear ALL OFF e Data Link Faulty Station Setting Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input Data XRY Hold Input Data RX RY 3 Precautions a When the output setting during CPU STOP is set to clear When the CPU module is in the STOP status the forced output to slave stations cannot be executed using GX Works2 b When refreshing data by a link direct device The output status of when the CPU module is set to STOP is the status set for the network operation settings Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 7 Cyclic transmission stop and restart During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission is stopped Data reception from a slave station and data sending from the own station are stopped Also the
148. e time until the status changes to 0 Cyclic transmission normal station may vary by several seconds If no response is received for several link scans the station is determined to be a cyclic transmission faulty station b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 SW00B0 SWO0BO 1po ofa 7fo sfala 2 1 to Data link status each SWO00B1 7 alla la swoop Station swooB2 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 SWO0B4 71 70 69 68 swo0Bs 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 swoos7 t hofferi Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the setting status of the reserved station 0 Other than reserved station also includes stations specified as reserved station disable status 1 Reserved station b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO swooc1 21 Swo0c3 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 ae sv00ca ao 797777078 78 73 72 711705066 67 06 os io Reserved station swo0c5 90 89 88 swooc7 setting status swoocs 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swooc7 hraofrrofrsafrr7fi tel is i14 113 Each number
149. ead Example Sending an interrupt request by turning on RX100 in a station in network number 7 JN Since change of RX100 may not be read L PLS X100 this cannot be specified as interrupt condition An interrupt cannot be generated Changes in the interrupt condition device cannot be detected if the change is shorter than the transmission delay time Using cyclic data in an interrupt program When an interrupt program is executed link refresh is not performed to CPU module devices Directly access the link devices of the Simple Motion module by link direct access Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 3 Setting example a Starting the interrupt program of the master station station number 0 when RX100 turns on The following is a setting example to execute the interrupt program corresponding to the interrupt pointer 150 when RX100 turns on by turning on the corresponding switch on the slave station side Simple Motion module Master station Slave station CPU module Station No 0 Station No 17 Interrupt program execution Switch E 1 Set the interrupt setting parameters for the Simple Motion module station number 0 in the Interrupt Settings window as shown below E Network Parameter CC IE Field Interrupt Settings Module No 1 2 Set the parameters in the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window as shown below Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Se
150. ed stations Reserved stations can not be enabled from local stations if the selected station is a local station sub master station sub master operation t is only possible to view the list of reserved stations Enabled reserved stations will remain active until the master station sub master station master operation is tumed OFF or reset At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station Reserved Station List 15 Reserved Station 15 Reserved Station 15 Reserved Station No Setting MB Unassigned station number Legend Operation Method Function Disable Not Selectable Not selectable Operation Method 4 1 Set a station to reserved station errors by clicking the appropriate station number box 2 Click the apply OK button to reflect the changes 15 Reserved Station 15 Station To Enable Reserved To Disable Station Function 5 In Reserved Station List click the number of the target station The text turns red and the background turns orange Only reserved stations can be selected The background of a reserved station number is displayed in light blue Reserved Station Function Enable x Temporarily enable reserved stations Reserved stations can not be enabled from local stations if the selected station is a local station sub master station sub master operation
151. ee een ene f Data Link Faulty Station Setting A 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 b Cyclic data output when a stop error occurs in the CPU module Select PLC Parameter and set it in Intelligent Function Module Detailed Setting Project Window Parameter PLC Parameter I O Assignment tab gt Detailed Setting button Error Time Output Mode Intelligent Function Module Detailed Setting 2 Precautions a When data link is stopped by users When cyclic transmission is stopped using one of the following methods the input status of the faulty station is held e CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to Section 9 4 e Link special relay SB link special register SW Refer to Section 11 3 b Setting on a station with a data link error When the following settings are set to Hold on the station where a data link error has occurred the input status of the own station upon error is held regardless of setting e Network Operating Setting Output Setting During CPU STOP Refer to Section 8 3 6 2 e PLC Parameter Intelligent Function Module Detailed Setting Error Time Output Mode Refer to Section 8 3 5 1 b Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 8 3 6 Output status setting for CPU module STOP When the CPU module mounted with a Simple Motion module is setto STOP whether cyclic data output is held or cleared can be selected 1 Range where the setting becomes enabled Th
152. eeeeeeaeeeeaceeeeaeeseaeeseaeeeeaeeesaeeeseneeseeetsueeesnneetans 7 2 2 Parameter Sii at 7 3 Fa Network Settings 2 24 sa taine cata ina heath aaa aa 7 5 7 4 Network Configuration Settings ceccecseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaeeeeeseneeeaes 7 8 7 5 Network Operation Settings ccceccseceseeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeesneeseeesieesieesieesaeesieesieesieesieesieee 7 20 7 6 Refresh Parameters 00 ada 7 21 7 7 Interrupt Settings reihen ni eA n R 7 25 Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING This chapter describes CC Link IE Field Network parameters The CC Link IE Field Network parameters are set for either the master station or slave stations This manual describes network parameters for Simple Motion modules For slave station settings refer to the manuals for the slave stations used 7 1 Parameter and Backup GX Works2 and Simple Motion Module Setting Tool of GX Works2 are used for each parameter setting of the Simple Motion module Set the required parameter based on the target station No Since the modules which save each parameter setting are different when the CPU module or Simple Motion module is exchanged rewrite the parameter to the exchanged module A programming tool used for each parameter setting and modules which backup each parameter setting are shown below Note 1 For details of parameters refer to the MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control Target station N
153. eeeeeeeeteeeeeeees Appendix 31 Appendix 4 5 Calculation formula for operation cycle ccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeeseneetsaees Appendix 31 Appendix 5 Comparison of QU71GF11 T2 ccccccccccccessccssseecsecesseccsseccsseeccseecesseccaeecsseeeseeeetseeesas Appendix 32 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals e QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives For the product To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to the MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control RELEVANT MANUALS 1 Simple Motion module Manual Name wes Description lt Manual number model code gt MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Specifications of the QD77GF and information on how to Positioning Control establish a system maintenance and inspection and troubleshooting Functions programming and buffer memory for the lt IB 0300202 1XB956 gt positioning control of the
154. efault value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC Parameter contains an out of range value Lo cms 11 8 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 5 Open the initial setting window for the D A converter module L60DA4 and set parameters as follows Project window Intelligent Function Module L60DA4 Parameter CH1 CH2 Sets method of D A conversion control 0 Enable 0 Enable 1 Disable Sets for warnings on D A conversion 1 Disable Warning output upper limit value Warning output lower limit value function Scaling enable disable setting Scaling upper limit value Scaling lower limit value Seto the lower Ens value for acon akala peel ree aera rd a disable this setting will be ignored 32000 to 32000 6 Open the auto refresh window for the D A converter module L60DA4 and set parameters as follows Project window gt Intelligent Function Module L60DA4 Auto Refresh Display Filter Display All w1008 w1010 Latest address of error history o cio Transfers the data of specified device to the buffer memory Digital value wi w2 Transfer Direction t ion Module lt PLC Buffer Memory Address 4 4h Transfer Word Counts 1 Stores digital value for D A conversion in 16 bit signed binary 7 Write the parameters to the head module Then reset the head module or turn off and on the power Online Write to PLC or Power OFF gt 0ON
155. egister SW 6 Click the Execute button The execution status of cyclic transmission can be checked in Link Status Link Start Stop Ea Network Information Connected Station Information Network Type E CIE Field Network No 1 Station Type Master Station Station No 0 Link Start Stop Setting Contents All Stations Information Select AI Cancel Al Selections_ Seda Bio DEIA ets 4 am Operating Master Station Operating Intelligent Device Station Operating Intelligent Device Station Operating Intelligent Device Station EELCO TAA Tink Star Stop Exec iting Contents Link Start C Link Stop j 5 I Forced Link Start i Forced Link Start will be executed for the station that is link stopped by J ehor stations or the station that is ink stopped by special relay special WALEED A CAE Issuing request for link start stop contents in stations that are on selected status in all stations information Link status might not be changed immediately because of circuit status factor When the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off and on Even if cyclic transmission has been stopped by this function it will restart e Stations to which the link start cannot be executed The link start cannot be executed to the following stations e Station where cyclic transmission was stopped due to an error e Station where link was stopped by a command f
156. elect whether to hold or clear cyclic data output by Output Setting During the station No 17 to 120 when the CPU module Clear ALL OFF All invalid for the CPU STOP mounted with the Simple Motion module is set to station No 1 to 16 e Hold i Default Hold STOP Refer to Section 8 3 6 Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 6 Refresh Parameters Set link refresh ranges between the link devices of the Simple Motion module and the devices of the CPU module 1 Setting procedure 1 Set network setting parameters Refer to Section 7 3 2 Open the setting window in GX Works2 Project window Parameter Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Refresh Parameters button 3 Set parameters in the window 4 Click the End button E Network Parameter CC IE Field Refresh Parameters Module No 1 Assignment Method C Points Start Start End Transfer SB Transfer SW Transfer 1 Transfer 2 Transfer 3 Transfer 4 Transfer 5 Transfer 6 Transfer 7 Transfer 8 ttttttt41t t Default Check End Cancel Description Select a link device assignment method Assignment Method e Points Start Enter the points and start numbers of link devices Start End Enter the start and end numbers of link devices Set the link refresh ranges of SB and SW One range can be set for
157. elligent Device Statidn SAI WUNho mm ID E ID ID i Select Reserved Station 2 Temporary canceling restoring the reserved station setting Use this setting when connecting a reserved slave station to the network For details on how to temporarily cancel the reserved station setting refer to Section 9 6 Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 8 6 Interrupt Request to the CPU Module Interrupt conditions are checked every link scan and if the interrupt conditions are met an interrupt request is made to the CPU module to start the interrupt program CPU module Simple Motion module r I SIA Interrupt Be i erations condition check I p t 5 mn Link device RX RY RWr RWw change oa ef No I I I i I I I I i I I I I I I Network status i SB SW i I I I i I i I I I I i I I I J 527 AO change 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i taani 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E Check detection methods and interrupt conditions in every link scan e Level Detect and ON Level Detect and OFF Edge Detect and ON Edge Detect and OFF Check detection methods and interrupt conditions in every link scan e Level Detect and Equal Level Detect and Unequal Edge Detect and Equal Edge Dete
158. en specified as a connected station The CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics cannot be started when another station has been specified in Other Station Setting of the Transfer Setup window Directly connect the supported programming tool to the slave station to be diagnosed and start the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics e Starting diagnostics from the System Monitor window The CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics can also be started from the System Monitor window Click the Simple Motion module Click the moss button System Monitor Connection Channel List Berial Port PLC Module Connection USB Operation to Selected Module Main Base Slot QD77GFi6 m e s Detailed Information H W Information Diagnostics j Eror Hoy Doa nee e Base Information 1 Module Information List Main Base Base Module Base Model Name Eon Base Sots Modes Status BASE series Model Name Point a a HO e a Main Base Exist Q 8 1 z Power Power 5 i cru la qo3uovcru u oo Q QD77GF1S 32Point Intel 32Point 0000 1 0 0 1 Empty Empty 16Point 0020 0 2 Empty Empty 16Point 0030 0 3 Empty Empty 16Point 0040 04 Empty Empty 16Point 0050 0 5 Empty Empty 16Point 0060 06 Empty Empty 16Point 0070 0 7 Empty Empty 16Point 0080 Legend Error O Major Error A Moderate Error A Minor Error _ D Assignment Error_ 62 Assignment Incorrect St
159. ent device station remote device station is turned on or off e The time from when data are set to the CPU module device of the master station until the data are output to the intelligent device station remote device station Calculation sie With block data assurance per station Without block data assurance per station valu SM X n2 CT X 1 Rio SM X 1 CT_ X 1 Rio SM X n2 RE SM X 2 CT X 2 Rio SM Master station sequence scan time CT Operation cycle n2 CT SM Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer Rio Intelligent device station remote device station processing time Refer to the manual of the intelligent device station remote device station used Appendix 30 Appendices Appendix 4 4 Transmission delay time of dedicated instructions The following is the formula to calculate the transmission delay time of dedicated instructions time after a dedicated instruction is issued until the execution of the instruction is completed 1 Between the master station and an intelligent device station remote device station a Master station Intelligent device station remote device station TD1 05 CT x 12 x m Rio SM ms CT Operation cycle Rio Intelligent device station remote device station processing time SM Master station sequence scan time m Number of divided sending Value that Data length 480 is rounded up to the nearest integer Appendix 4 5 Calculation formula for operation c
160. entium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies IB NA 0300203 C MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual MODEL QD77GF U SN E MODEL 1XB957 IB NA 0300203 C 1409 MEE sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 a NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
161. equest source and retry the operation transmission Network No error in transient D208H e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation transmission Target station No error in transient D209H to D20AH ae transmission D20BH Specified master station No error Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the in transient transmission operation Current master station No error in D20CH ta te transient transmission e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool When the own station or target station detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation Transient data transmission completion wait timeout e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly transient transmission operation transmission the request source and retry the operation transmission operation 12 13 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Own station No not set dedicated E D211H instruction Set the station number in the parameter setting and retry the operation instructi e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are Transient transmission failed connected properly e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation Correct the request command at the request sou
162. er s manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used 8 3 3 Direct access to link devices Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS Direct access to each link device RX RY RWr RWw SB or SW of the Simple Motion module is possible from the program Specify a link device as the link direct device JE for direct access 1 Specification method Specify the network No and the link device of the Simple Motion module for reading or writing Do not access outside the device range that is described below JON a a Remote input RX 777 777 XO to X1FFF Remote output RY YO to Y1FFF Remote register RWw WO to W3FF Remote register RWr s ccrss W400 to W7FF Link special relay SB SBO to SB1FF Link special register SW SWO to SW1FF NetworkNo gt 5 1 to 239 Example P Network No 1 CPU module Slave station Master station Simple M modu J1Y1000 J1 X1100 Send request MOV K20 J1 W100 RWw100 RWw100 J1 W2100 K300 RWr100 RWr100 DTT qu Cyclic transmission Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 2 Readable and writable range Data can be read or written between the Simple Motion module and CPU module mounted on the same base unit a Read All link devices of the Simple Motion module can be specified
163. er station s CPU module OFF Normal ON Continuation error occurred Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Appendix 13 SB0120 PORT error frame reception status each station Appendices Description Stores if an error frame is received at each station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT1 error frame reception status each station SW0120 to SW0127 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of PORT1 error frame reception status each station SW0120 to SW0127 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0121 PORT1 error frame reception status master station Stores if an error frame is received at the master station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON_ An error frame has been received Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0130 PORT2 error frame reception status each station Stores if an error frame is received at each station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received t
164. er that received an error frame can be checked using link special registers SWs of the same number other than SB0121 and SB0141 Details on the causes of error can be checked using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs corresponding to the station number where the error has occurred Refer to Section 11 3 3 b SW0120 to SB0120 PORT1 error frame reception status each station SW0127 PORT1 error frame reception status each station PORT1 error frame reception status master SB0121 station SW0130 to SB0130 PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0137 PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0140 to i SB0140 PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0147 PORT1 error frame detection each station SB0141 PORT1 error frame detection master station SW0150 to SB0150 PORT2 error frame detection each station SWO0157 PORTZ2 error frame detection each station 11 18 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING b Checking the line status own station 1 If there is a line error in the own station one of SBOO6A SB006C and SBOOGE will turn on 2 The line status can be checked using SW0064 SW0068 and SWO0069 SBOO6A PORT1 linkup status own station SWO0064 Connection status own station SB006C PORT1 error frame reception status own station SW0068 PORT line error occurrence rate max SBOO6E PORT1 error frame detection own station SWO0069 PORT line error occurrence rate present
165. et input data will be held for two seconds after disconnection Input status of data link faulty station The RWr and RWw input data are held regardless of any setting e Master station RWr Cyclic data output when a stop error occurs Clearing or holding the RY data only the output data from the own station of the master in the CPU module station can be selected Area for which Clear or Hold can be selected in the data link faulty station input status setting Area for which Clear or Hold can be selected in the cyclic output setting for a stop error of the CPU module Area where data are held regardless of the setting Area that is dependent on the setting of the intelligent device station LJ DOOO DODO ooog 0000 0000 0000 ion No 19 Intelligent Intelligent elligent device device device station station station station RX Station No 17 Station No 18 Station No 17 Station No 18 Station No 19 RWw No 17 Station No 18 Station No 19 Station No 17 Station No 18 Station No 19 meee ee A a a A A N N A E A E A a N Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 1 Setting method a Input status of data link faulty station Set this item in the Network Operation Settings window Refer to Section 7 5 lt Network Operation Settings Parameter Name Output Setting During CPU STOP m Hold Clear ALL OFF pr ee rn
166. et madens system monitor of the selected station Change the operation state run reset stop etc of the Remote Operation SEE Displays the Simple Motion module being diagnosed When multiple Simple Motion modules are mounted the target module can be changed Change Module button When multiple Simple Motion modules of the same network number are mounted on the same u Select Diagnostics Destination base unit the module with the smallest start I O number is always diagnosed regardless of setting Select a station to be diagnosed If an error occurs in the selected station Error is displayed after the station number Select Station i SPE A station to be diagnosed can be selected by clicking the module icon displayed in the network map display area Start Monitor woe button Starts monitoring of the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics u Stop Monitor o E F F e button Stops monitoring of the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics u Deletes a disconnected station displayed in the network map display area The deleted station is Hide Disconnected Station button h f p 4 p sispay displayed in the disconnected station monitor area Monitor Status Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Displays the meaning of icons displayed in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window Legend So Station Type Master Local Sub master Station r Master Local Sub maste
167. et status of data in case of abnormal end 0 After S1 11 no data is set for abnormal end 1 After S1 11 data is set for abnormal end The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion Bene 0 Normal System u Other than 0 Error Refer to Section 12 5 S1 2 Channels used Specify the channels to be used by the own station dia vi by own station Refer to Section 10 2 2 Specify the CPU module on the target station to be accessed 0000H Control CPU The access destination is the same as that of Target station s when O3FFH is selected 0000H ds CPU type 03FFH Control CPU 03FFH If the above error occurs and the instruction fails execute the instruction again beet Specify the network No of the target station Target station s 1 to 239 1 to 239 Network No User network No i 254 254 Specify this when 254 is set for Jn Specify the target station number Master station 125 7DH Target station Intelligent device station 1 to 120 125 7DH number 1 to 120 When 125 7DH is set the module always accesses the master station station number 0 sis unused o user During instruction execution For the case where the instruction is not completed within the monitoring Oto 15 es Number of time specified by S1 8 specify the number of times the instruction is resends resent When the instruction is completed System The number of resends result is stored Specify the monitoring time unt
168. f an error frame was received from power on until the present at the own station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON _ An error frame has been received SB0074 Reserved station specification status Stores the reserved station specification status due to parameters The reserved station number can be checked using Reserved station setting status SW00C1 to SWO00C7 OFF Not specified ON Specified SB007A Event history status Stores the network event history occurrence OFF No event history ON Event history found If the event history is found the cumulative number of network event history can be checked by the Event count SW007A Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Event count SW007A may be offset by one sequence scan This area is cleared when Event count clear SB0009 is turned on SB007B Input data status of data link faulty station Stores the own station s setting status for Data Link Disorder Station Setting OFF OFF or cleared to 0 ON Hold SB007D Hold clear status setting for CPU STOP Stores the own station s setting status for Output Setting during CPU STOP OFF Hold ON Clear ALL OFF Appendix 11 Appendices Description Stores the baton pass status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Faulty station found If a faulty station is found the status of each station can be checked by Baton pass s
169. f cyclic transmission is stopped with error an error code will be stored in Data link stop status entire system SW0053 Turn off System link stop SB0003 11 15 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING Cyclic transmission restart 8 Specify the station to restart cyclic transmission in the following link special registers SWs e Specifying a target station Link stop start direction SW0000 e Specifying a station number Link stop start direction SW0002 to SW0008 9 Turn on System link start SB0002 10 When the Simple Motion module accepts the request System link start request accept status SB0054 turns on 11 When cyclic transmission restart is completed System link start completion status SB0055 turns on 12 If cyclic transmission is restarted with error an error code will be stored in Data link start status entire system SW0052 13 Turn off System link start SB0002 SB0002 System link start SWO0000 Link stop start direction SW0002 to are System link stop SW0008 Link stop start direction ssoos7___ System ink stop completion status 11 16 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 2 Checking data link status Data link status is checked using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics as well as link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs Refer to Chapter 9 a Checking the data link status other stations 1 Link scan time can be checked using SWO005A SWO005B Md 134 Operation time and Md 135
170. get Buffer memory Own station D750 Target station 256 100H D849 UN 355 163H Start I O number 0020H Network No 1 b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB link special register SW Baton pass status each station of SB0047 Baton pass status own station SWO00A1 0 5 station No 17 e Devices used by users M111 Start contact M113 Completion status indication device D750 to 3 M112 Completion device D849 Read data storage device For details on link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to Appendix 2 and Appendix 3 c Program example The following program is written to the CPU module of station No 0 M111 SB47 SWOA1 0 1 AF IF KO gt KO gt H2ZP REMFR J1 K3 K17 H2 H100 D750 K100 M112 Execution of REMFR instruction M12 MB M113 10 43 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 9 ZP REMTO Writing Data to the Intelligent Device Station Remote Device Station This instruction writes data to the buffer memory of the intelligent device station remote device station In units of words Start contact ZP REMTO 2 Setting data Internal device Fil Link direct device Intelligent function Note 1 e ee System user E a JO module device i j Union Note 1 Local devices and file registers set for each program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Setby_ Data type String 16 bit Jn Jn Tar
171. get network No 1 to 239 binary i m Channels used by own station 1 to 32 m Tage station No 1 to 120 Head module The start I O number of the intelligent function module 00 to FEH Upper two digits of the I O number expressed in tes 16 bit binary three digits Module other than a head module Fixed to 00 device station remote device station where data is written store Number of write points 1 to 240 words 16 bit binary Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails 10 44 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Function a REMTO instruction overview The instruction writes data by the specified number of words n5 from the own station start device S into the buffer memory after n4 of the intelligent device station remote device station Specify the target stations in setting data Jn Jn n2 and n3 When the writing of data is completed the completion device D turns on Own station Target station CPU module Simple Motion Head module Intelligent function module module Channel 1 Channel n S n4 n5 words Channel 32 b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following Refer to Section 10 1 1 c Checking the execution status of the REMTO instructio
172. gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual have been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found to not be t
173. he current zoom size is displayed by placing the mouse pointer on this area 3 Network map A network map is displayed according to the connection status Actual system configuration Star topology GX Works2 Master station T Station No 0 Switching hub Ak Intelligent device station 7 Intelligent device station 7 Intelligent device station Station No 17 Station No 18 Station No 19 Network map display area Inteligent18 Inteligent18 Actual system configuration Line topology GX Works2 Master station Intelligent device station Intelligent device station Station No 0 ql Station No 17 rh Station No 18 Network map display area Connected St Master D Inteligent17 Intelligert 18 P1 E E Chapter 9 _CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Actual system configuration Star and line mixed GX Works2 Master station Station No 0 Switching hub em Intelligent device Intelligent device Intelligent device station Station No 17 station Station No 18 station Station No 19 Network map Network Status Network map display area display area Connected St Inteligent 19 Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Note that in the following cases the network map that is different from the actual system configuration is displayed e Two stations are connected through a switching hub Branches are not displayed i
174. he reflection status and setting contents of parameters can be checked using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs a Checking the parameter status other stations 1 When a station on the network has a parameter error Parameter error status each station SB0170 is turned on 2 The station number where the parameter error occurs is stored in Parameter error status each station SW0170 to SW0177 3 Details on the parameters on each station can be checked using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs on each station SW0170 to SB0170 Parameter error status each station SW0177 Parameter error status each station b Checking the parameter status own station 1 When a parameter has an error Received parameter error SB004D turns on and the error code is stored in Parameter setting status SW004C SB004D Received parameter error SW004C Parameter setting status 2 When the parameter is set in the Simple Motion module contents of the parameter are stored in the following link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs SW0040 Network No SB0040 Network type own station A SW0042 Station No SB0043 Mode own station SW0043 Mode status SB0044 Station setting own station 1 SS SS SW0046 Module type SW0058 Number of total slave stations setting SW0059 Number of total slave stations current value Reserved station specification status Input data status of
175. he responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries P
176. he status of each station can be checked by the PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0130 to SW0137 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0130 to SW0137 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0140 PORT1 error frame detection each station Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at each station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0140 to SW0147 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0140 to SW0147 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0141 PORT1 error frame detection master station Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the master station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON_ An error frame has been received at least once Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Appendix 14 Appendices Description Stores if an error frame was re
177. his buffer memory stores the start number and the number of points of RX for each station Un G63152 Station No 17 Offset Un G63153 Station No 17 Size in units of words Un G63154 Station No 18 Offset Un G63155 Station No 18 Size in units of words E 2 3 Un G63358 Station No 120 Offset Un G63359 Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size of buffer memory areas for each station number can be calculated using the following formulas e Offset buffer memory address 63152 station No 17 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 63153 station No 17 x 2 Appendix 1 3 RY offset size information Un G63360 to Un G63567 This buffer memory stores the start number and the number of points of RY for each station Un G63360 Station No 17 Offset Un G63361 Station No 17 Size in units of words Un G63362 Station No 18 Offset Un G63363 Station No 18 Size in units of words Un G63566 Station No 120 Offset Un G63567 Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size of buffer memory areas for each station number can be calculated using the following formulas e Offset buffer memory address 63360 station No 17 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 63361 station No 17 x 2 Appendix 4 Appendices Appendix 1 4 RWw offset size information Un G63568 to Un G63775 This buffer memory stores the start number and the number of points of RWw for each station
178. il instruction completion A If the instruction is not completed within the specified time the instruction is Arrival monitoring e PS resent for the number of resends specified by S1 7 0 to 32767 User i 0 10 seconds 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 seconds 10 9 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Setting data Setting range Set by 1 to 960 Read data length Specify the number of words to be read From QnACPU 1 to 480 words so fused ser The valid or invalid status of data after S1 12 is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The S1 11 Clock set flag stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally System completed 0 Invalid 1 Valid Clock data of abnormal end are stored in BCD format Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed S1 12 to b15 b8 b7 bO S1 15 91 12 Month 01H to 12H Year 00H to 99H last 2 digits System S1 13 Hour 00H to 23H Day 01H to 31H S1 14 Second 00H to 59H Minute 00H to 59H S1 15 Year OOH to 99H first 2 digits Day of week OOH to 06H 00H Sun to 06H Sat When the target station is QNACPU OOH is stored in the year the first two digits of
179. imple Motion module If an error has occurred in the Simple Motion module identify the error cause using GX Works2 Refer to Section 12 2 12 4 1 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed The following lists the actions to be taken if cyclic data are not delivered to the master or a slave station Check item If the D LINK LED is flashing or off perform troubleshooting Refer to Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station on Section 12 3 1 In Network Configuration Settings of the master station is a 3 a Cancel the reserved station setting Refer to Section 7 4 slave station specified as a reserved station In Network Configuration Settings of the master station is RX RY Setting or RWw RWr Setting for slave stations configured Set RX RY or RWw RWr data for each slave station within the allowable range Refer to Section 7 4 Do the station numbers set in Network Configuration Settings of the master station match those set for Correct station number s corresponding slave stations Do the station types set in Network Configuration Settings of the master station match those set for the connected slave stations Check the station types set in Network Configuration Settings of the master station Correct the refresh parameters Link devices and link refresh assignment can be confirmed in either of the following e Network Configuration Settings window Refer to Section 7 4 e Assig
180. in the offset of the link device in the slave station s Parameter error device range D612H setting data and retry the operation assignment error RWw Sat F e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again f e Correct the value in the size of the link device in the slave station s Parameter error device range D613H j setting data and retry the operation assignment error RWr y i 4 Le a e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the value in the offset of the link device in the slave station s Parameter error device range f D614H setting data and retry the operation assignment error RWr ts e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative 12 19 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the value in the size of the link device in the slave station s Parameter error device range j D615H j setting data and retry the operation assignment error RY o i pee 3 e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again R Correct the value in the offset of the link device in
181. in the station number is stored in the station information area Un G64016 Station number 0 Own station Simple Motion module 1 to 120 Slave station Other than 0 to 120 Stores 0 in all station information area 2 Station network card information Un G64017 to Un G 64020 This buffer memory stores the station information set in the station number 3 Station controller information Un G64025 to Un G64041 This buffer memory stores whether the value stored in the station Controller information controller information set in the station number is valid or invalid valid invalid flag 0 Invalid 1 Valid Un G64026 Manufacturer code Un G64025 Un G64027 Model type Un G64028 Model code Un G64029 Version Verson i uber Un G64030 to Un G64039 Model name string Vendor specific device Un G64040 to Un G64041 i information This buffer memory stores the station information set in the station Appendix 6 Appendices Example When the head module LJ72GF15 T2 Station No 17 is connected Address Name Value Decimal Hexadecimal 64017 FA11H 64018 Op las S Model type 31 FA12H Station information 64019 Network card information Model code 2 FA13H 64020 Version Displays the product version FA14H 64021 to 64024 System area Displays 0 in all addresses FA15H to FA18H 64025 NN Controller information valid invalid flag FA19H 64026 Manufacturer code FA1AH Man
182. in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Holds the data immediately before the error This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SW00A0 to SWO00A7 e Stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Appendix 22 Appendices Stores the RUN status of each station 0 RUN STEP RUN 1 STOP PAUSE stop error b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SWOOFO 16 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 5 4 3 SWOOF1 SWOOF2 48 SWOOF3 64 SWOOF4 80 SWOOFO to SWOOF7 station swooF6 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 SWOOF7 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWODAO to SWO00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the stop error status for each station 0 Normal 1 Stop error b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swo100 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1 SW0101 swotoz swo103 SW0104 80 79 74 73 7271 70 SW0100 Operation
183. ination station Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Access the network the event history log Reserved Station View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Fu tions Function Enable reserved stat View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily ignore station errors Selected Station Operation E CPU status of the selected station can be checked by starting Sesten Mentor system monitor of the selected station Renee Operate Change the operation state run reset stop etc of the Remote Oorretion selected station If a mark such as and s displayed in Network Status an error has occurred Use the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics to identify the cause of the error and take actions Refer to Section 9 2 Example If an error has occurred in a head module the window appears as follows Network Status Total Slave Stations 1 Tot Set In Parameter Co Connected St Master 0 Intelligent 17 t 11 10 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 11 2 5 Program example The following is an example of the program to be written to a CPU module on the master station 1 Program example of L6o0DA4 I O signals of D A converter module L60DA4 X1000 Module READY Y1001 CH1 Output enable disable flag a External power supply READY X1007 flag Y1002 CH2 Output enable disable flag X10
184. indow 1 Displayed items Inteligent 17 CCIE Field Diagnostics E Select Diagnostics Destination E Monitor Status E Select Module Module 1 Network No 1 Change Module Station No 17 Error z Station Montoro tran a Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station r Set In Parameter 3 Connected 2 ScanTme O mS Errors Detected 1 Hide Disconnected Station Legend E ELES A 4t No 19 Li 1 Disconnected station 1 r display area monitor area Intelligent 18 1 08 a ais Y pomm XX ee ee ee e a A _ 4 Operation Test Selected Station Communication Status Monitor U E Check the transient communication route from the connected 2 station to the destination station Station No 17 Error Mode Online Check the communication route whether you can reach communication target station from the specified station MAC Address illb AHIT i Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station Module Eror Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Access the network the event history log DS View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Function Enable reserved stations A se View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily E ear inore station errors Selected Station Operation CPU status of the selected station can be checked by starting
185. ing per Station Operation Setting for Returning 3 Network Operation Settings Output Setting During CPU STOP 4 Refresh Parameters O Always A When required Cannot be set e When parameters are not set Section 7 4 Section 7 5 O Section 7 6 A Section 7 7 The Simple Motion module operates as the master station in network number 1 In this case only transient transmission is performed performed Cyclic transmission is not 2 Parameters set for slave stations other than Simple Motion modules For the settings of a slave station refer to the manual for the slave station used Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 3 Network Settings Set the network number station number and other parameters for the Simple Motion module 1 Setting procedure 1 Open the setting window in GX Works2 Project window Parameter Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET 2 Set parameters in the window 3 Click the End button Eb Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Ecm Y Set network configuration setting in CC TE Field configuration window Module 1 Modde 2 Modde 3 Module 4 Network Type CC IE Field Motion Master Station None None gt None Start 17O No 0000 Network Ne 1 Total Stations 3 Group No Mode Onine Normal Mode z z CC IE Field Configuration Setting Netu tings im Spec Station No
186. ion 8 3 3 i 3 link devices the Simple Motion module directly Assurance of cyclic data integrity The cyclic data integrity is assured in units of 32 bits or station based units Section 8 3 4 Input status setting for data link faulty Whether input data from another station where a data link error occurs is Section 8 3 5 i 3 station cleared or held is selected When the CPU module mounted with a Simple Motion module is set to p Output status setting for CPU STOP j Section 8 3 6 STOP whether cyclic data output is held or cleared can be selected r When a stop error occurs in the CPU module where a Simple Motion module Output status setting for CPU stop i A 4 EA is mounted whether cyclic transmission output is held or cleared can be Section 8 3 5 selected During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission is stopped Data reception from a slave station and data sending from the own station are Section 8 3 7 stopped Also the stopped cyclic transmission is restarted Section 9 4 Transient transmission does not stop Cyclic transmission stop and restart Chapter 3_ SPECIFICATIONS Transient transmission Communications within the same Transient transmission is performed to other stations using dedicated Chapter 10 network instructions and GX Works2 J 4 Diagnostic functions The status of CC Link IE Field Network can be checked using GX Works2 CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics The error locations er
187. ion Module User s Manual Positioning Control 3 Precautions a Adding slave stations Do not connect slave stations more than 120 stations If a station is added toa system having 120 slave stations all stations will fail and data link cannot be performed b Connecting devices to the same network Do not connect an Ethernet device e g personal computer other than CC Link IE Field Network device to the switching hub used on CC Link IE Field Network Doing so will cause timeout in the master station resulting in disconnection of all the stations Chapter 5_ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION c Connecting disconnecting a cable and powering off on a device When the operations listed below are performed all stations on the network may be reconnected At that time the operation cycle may be over the connected slave stations may be disconnected momentary or the slave station may not be returned even if the cable is reconnected Network configuration e Powering a slave station or switching hub off and on e Connecting disconnecting an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub e Disconnecting an Ethernet cable from a slave station and connecting it to Star topology another slave station or the switching hub Disconnecting more than nine stations or half the number of slave stations or more in the system Changing the network topology when adding a slave station Simultaneously powering off on systems on multiple stations e Simult
188. ion communication communication communication function Supported function Supported function Supported function Not supported Operation cycle 1 Simple Motion module Slave station 1 i i i Synchronous communication function Supported Slave station 16 f f 1 Synchronous communication function Supported Slave station 17 1 1 1 Synchronous communication function Supported Slave station 18 Synchronous communication function Not supported l Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS PONT The synchronous communication function with slave modules excluding servo amplifiers is supported from the version shown below First five digits of SERIAL No Slave modules operate in the normal mode asynchronous communication mode 15092 or later Slave modules operate following the setting Note 1 The serial number can be checked on the Product Information List screen in GX Works2 Before 15092 The link special registers SW for synchronous communication function are shown below Stores the setting information of synchronous asynchronous communication of the synchronous communication function for each station 0 Asynchronous communication mode 1 Synchronous communication mode b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 communication function information each station SW01C6 112 Ea
189. ion number was attempted online from the master station the target station does not have the online station number setting function Station No setting not available for Ae f D22EH e Check the manual for the target station if the station number setting the target station oe function is available If the function is supported by the model please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative D22FH No baton pass executed in the Check the communication status of the station whose station number is to target station be changed f e The station number change was attempted for the own station D230H Invalid station No setting e Check that no station number is set for the target station D231H Station No already set in the target The station number has been already set for the target station station e Check that no station number is set for the target station e The station where the station number change was attempted does not D232H Station No setting target not exist exist e Check that no station number is set for the target station D233H Station No setting out of range Set the station number within 1 to 120 and retry the operation D234H No baton pass executed Check the communication status e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool D235H Transient error e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly e If this err
190. ired System Bit Device name Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon completion of the instruction D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails 10 22 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a Control data Setting data Setting range Set by to to bO 0 1 Execution type bit 0 0 Without arrival confirmation When the target station is on the same network The process is completed when data is sent from the own station station 1 With arrival confirmation Execution The process is completed when data is written in the target station abnormal end type source station When 0 Without arrival confirmation is specified the result is regarded as normal on the own station even if the writing to the target station fails as follows When communication ends normally even though sent data are abnormal 2 Abnormal end type bit 7 Specify the data set status in case of abnormal end 0 After S1 11 no data is set for abnormal end 1 After S1 11 data for abnormal end is set The status of the instruction completion is stored Completion status 0 Normal Other than 0 Error Refer to Section 12 5 10 23 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Setting data Setting range Set by S1 2 Channels used by Specify the channels to be used by the own station A zer own station Refer to Section 10 2 2 1 Specify the CPU module on the target sta
191. isassemble the batteries O The electrolytic capacitor will generate gas during a fault so do not place your face near the module or servo amplifier O The electrolytic capacitor and fan will deteriorate Periodically replace these to prevent secondary damage from faults Please contact with our sales representative Lock the control panel and prevent access to those who are not certified to handle or install electric equipment Do not mount remove the module and base or terminal block more than 50 times IEC61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause malfunction Do not burn or break a module and servo amplifier Doing so may cause a toxic gas 9 About processing of waste When you discard module servo amplifier a battery primary battery and other option articles please follow the law of each country area Z CAUTION O This product is not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that can affect or endanger human life When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in passenger transportation medical aerospace atomic power electric power or submarine repeating applications please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative O Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control you are strongly advised to install safety devices to forestall serious accide
192. iscarding the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Close with Reflecting the Setting Equally assign link devices to stations with preset conditions i Equal Assignment Assigns the link device points equally Assigns the points equally to the link device of Station No 17 120 Also link device being set to Station No 1 16 is deared Start Station RX RY Equal Assignment RWw RWr Equal Assignment Start Station Station Start Station Station 0 to the end station number End Station Station End Station Station End Station Start No Start No i ne 2 a IS ae Start Station to the end station number Start No Same values set in RX RY Setting and RWw RWr 1 Start Station Setting Enter the start station number of stations for which link devices Total Points Assigned are equally assigned Same values set in RX RY 2 End Station Setting and RWw RWr Enter the end station number of stations for which link devices Setting are equally assigned Default Blank 3 Start No Enter the start number of link devices to be equally assigned 4 Total Points Assigned Enter the total points of link devices to be equally assigned Chapter 7_ PARAMETER SETTING Setting range Assign the same link device points to all stations ia Identical Point Assignment neon Assigns the link device with the identical point according to the set number of total stations For the station induding
193. ists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation D25DH Incorrect transient data e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Set the target station number specified by the REMFR REMTO instruction D25CH Target station type error D269H to the station number of the intelligent device station or remote device REMFR REMTO station Target station No error y 7 D26AH Return the target station of the REMFR REMTO instruction REMFR REMTO e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Request data size error Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation elf the request source is in another network check the routing parameters are set correctly Relay station No error Dedicated instruction is in execution Retry the operation after a while Dedicated instruction in use elf this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Correct the target station type at the request source of the dedicated Target station type error dedicated instruction and retry the operation instruction elf this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or represent
194. itching hub and the cables at the request source are D2BOH Transient transmission failed connected properly e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation Not support function is executed in the CC Link IE Field network D300H Not support function execution error diagnostics Check the support functions of the simple motion module 12 18 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e In Network Configuration Setting cancel the temporary error invalid Parameter error temporary error D301H y station setting invalid station setting error i be e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D302H Parameter error network type e Correct the network type and retry the operation error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the mode and retry the operation D303H Parameter error mode error AR e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Change the operation cycle setting to a value longer than the current set value e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly After taking the above action switch the power on again or resetting the Dua
195. ivalent to the operation cycle of the Simple Motion module Appendix 29 Appendices Appendix 4 3 Cyclic transmission delay time The following is the formula to calculate cyclic transmission delay time 1 Between the master station and an intelligent device station remote device station a Master station RX RWr lt Intelligent device station remote device station input The following time is shown e The time from when a signal is input to the intelligent device station remote device station until the CPU module device of the master station is turned on or off The time from when data are input to the intelligent device station remote device station until the data are stored in the CPU module device of the master station Calculation ue With block data assurance per station Without block data assurance per station valu SM x 1 CT_x n1 Rio 1 CT x 1 Rio SM X 1 CT x n1 1 Rio 1 CT_x 2 Rio SM Master station sequence scan time CT Operation cycle n1 SM CT Round up the calculated value to the nearest integer Rio Intelligent device station remote device station processing time Refer to the manual of the intelligent device station remote device station used b Master station RY RWw gt Intelligent device station remote device station output The following time is shown e The time from when the CPU module device of the master station is turned on or off until the output of the intellig
196. k stop instructing stations different Instruct the data link start using the same method as the data link stop ex Data link is stopped using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and the data link is started using a program e Data link start failed Forcibly restart the data link D728H Data link start stop command Data link start was instructed during execution of data link Instruct data instructing stations different link stop then data link start west The area for writing history acquisition setting data for network event History acquisition setting data full 7 e history is insufficient Reset or power off and on the CPU module A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative baat The previous history acquisition setting data for network event history were D782H History acquisition setting data error s not written successfully Reset or power off and on the CPU module e The read request by the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool is incorrect Close the CC IE Field Diagnostics D783H to D784H Transient data request error window and request it again e Check the read request data at the request station and retry the operation gt
197. l window CC IE Field configuration window Select the checkbox next to Set the network configuration setting in the CC IE Field configuration window Refer to Section 7 2 Configure the network setting Refer to Section 7 3 Open the setting window on GX Works2 Project window Parameter Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET CC IE Field Configuration Setting button Select the module under Module List and drag and drop it to the station list area or the device map area The slave station is added to the station list area The added module is displayed in the device map area Configure the remaining settings in GX Works2 After the setting is completed close the window CC IE Field Configuration Close with Reflecting the Setting For how to operate the setting window refer to the following GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common Mode Setting online Normal Mode Assignment Method Startend v Link Scan Time Approx T ms Module List x cr A ai RXIRY Setting RWw RWr Setting tees Devic Select CCIE Field Find Module My Fi 4 gt a No Model Name STAR Station Type V 1 a Points Start End Points Start End RX z ora 1 m o Host station O Master Station Ur Field List of stations Y fm a uzes 17 Inteligent Device Station 128 0000 oo 64 0000 003F E A I y Bl CC IE Field Module Mitsubishi Elec 1 mm 2 172615 2 _18 _Inteligent Device Station 128 0080 O0F
198. le failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D110H to D113H Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Transient data received twice of the programming tool e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly D201H Header information error in Correct the header information at the request source and retry the transient transmission operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation D202H Send buffer full o eens e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly D203H Read write address error in Correct the read write address at the request source and retry the transient transmission operation Network No error in transient f D204H me Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation transmission D205H Target station No error in transient Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the transmission operation Network No error in transient D206H ans Correct the network number at the r
199. llowing are formulas to calculate the link refresh time 1 Calculation formula AT AR KM1 KM2 X PARYS RWRWw SW 0 ms Ae KM3 X LEA re Ww ms aT Sending side link refresh time aR Receiving side link refresh time RX Total number of RX points that are actually being link refreshed Note 1 RY Total number of RY points that are actually being link refreshed Note 1 RWr Total number of RWr points that are actually being link refreshed Neer RWw_ Total number of RWw points that are actually being link refreshed Note 1 SB Number of SB points SW Number of SW points aE Memory card file register R ZR extended data register D and extended link register W transfer time Wote 2 KM1 KM2 KM3 Constant Note 1 Total number of link device points for the range set by the refresh parameters and set in the network configuration settings Note that the points assigned to reserved stations are excluded Note 2 0 when not used When Simple Motion module is mounted in the main base unit CPU type KM1 KM KMS yP 10 10 QOOUJ QO0U Q01U QO2UCPU Universal model QCPU Q03UD Q03UDECPU oo on 030 Other than the above oo on o3 e When Simple Motion module is mounted in the extension base unit CPU type O O ee QO0UJ QO0U Q01U Q02UCPU 28 198 8 Universal model QCPU Q03UD Q03UDECPU 0 39 Other than the above li Appendix 4 2 Link scan time Link scan time is equ
200. log values are output from the channels If an error occurs while a digital value is written the output module AY 10 mounted to the master station will display an error code in BCD format Set a scaling value only for CH1 and configure the warning output setting only for CH2 11 2 1 System configuration example The following system configuration is used to explain communications between the master station and a head module 1 System configuration Power supply module Q62P Power supply module L61P CPU module Q10UDHCPU Head module LJ72GF15 T2 Simple Motion module QD77GF D A converter module L60DA4 Input module QX10 Input module LX40C6 Output module QY10 Output module LY10R2 END cover L6EC X Y00 X Y20 X Y30 X Y1000 X Y1010 X Y1020 to to to to to to X Y1F XIY2F X Y3F X Y100F X Y101F X Y102F N Y N S I Intelligent device station Station No 17 Master station Station No 0 Ethernet cable 1000BASE T Network No 1 11 3 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 2 Link device assignment a RX and RY assignment L60DA4 LX40C6 LY10R2 X X 10 1F CPU module Master station X X 0000 L60DA4 L60DA4 LX40C6 LX40C6 Ea Y L60DA4 L60DA4 LY10R2 LY10R2 Y Pl 2F Start I O No Start 1 O No Start I O No 0000H 0010H 0020H 7 CPU module Master station Head module L60DA4 Ww RWr Ww Warning output flag Latest 1010 error code FF i
201. lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0822 2013 12 18 14 45 44 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0821 2013 12 18 14 45 44 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0820 2013 12 18 14 45 28 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status Clear Event History History Acquisition Setting Create CSV Bile Refresh Close 4 Click the History Acquisition Setting button to select the events to be collected mn SY File Close Acquire and display the checked items in event history Items without checks wil not be saved in event history Events that cannot be acquired by the target station cannot be selected Select al Select None p Network Information Network Information Tinkapjlinkdown Detection T Baton pass status variation Z Baton pass status variation IT Data ink status variation FP Data ink status variation T Ignore station errors status change T Reception of Data Link Start Stop instruction I Reserved staton status change T Execution of Data Link Start Stop instruction T Detection of PLC RUN status change IT Reception of station Enable Disable ignore errors instruction TT Execution of station Enable Disable ignore errors instruction IT Reception of Enable Restore reserved station instruction Error Information Z Received Frame Error F erorinPLc Z Parameter Error
202. lty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative ee e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation Transient data transmission E DOA2H aa e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are processing wait timeout connected properly e If the own station or target station is disconnected from the network MIN identify the cause of the disconnection and take action DOA3H Transient data transmission error a Correct the number of the station for which transient data is to be sent and retry the operation e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly me e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation DOA4H to DOA6H Transient transmission failed The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation DOA7H Transient reception failed z The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Reserved station specification 7 s DOCOH Wait for a while and reserve the station again failed another process in progress Reserved station cancellation failed F i s i DOC1H i Wait for a while and cancel the rese
203. ly Additional correction partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELEVANT MANUALS Sep 2014 IB NA 0300203 C Additional correction partial correction Appendix 4 5 Japanese Manual Version IB 0300201 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS crure datos A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FORTHE PRODUCT 321 cocidas A 13 INTRODUCTION sec non nunca eran en St Sian in a e o A 14 REVISIONS A At facet Ee te ete toned Be BSE a ete he has A 15 CONTENTS 002224 fede kha aces teed icine atts scabs tat ae inate eal eat amok meted ah el etek ti A 16 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeaes A 19 RELEVANT MANUALS orcas eat atten tet ata aide a a cei eas it aie feet A 20 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION 0 ccecccececeeeeceeeeceeseaeeeeaeeeeaeeesaaeeseaeesaeeecaeeecaeeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeeeesaseeteneeseaees A 22 TERMO tia di bakit eh behest cok lara licitador ici lada A 23 PACKING ES TE tata etorri a tae eta i demuarta chads ss Maniac A 26 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK 1 1to 1 8 1 1 CC Link IE NA 1 2 1 2 Smple Motion Moquies ra 0 00 00d idad titi 1 4 2 NAMES OF
204. ly error data that is not transmitted to all stations When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared When FFFFH is counted counting stops Stores the cumulative count that data was received at the PORT1 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared When FFFFFFFFH is counted counting stops Stores the count of the network event history This stored count is cleared when Event count clear SB0009 is turned on When FFFFH is counted the value returns to 0 and the module continues to count Appendix 20 Appendices Stores the REMFR REMTO execution status for each channel 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion Refer to Section 12 5 SW0080 Channel 1 SW0090 Channel 17 SW0081 Channel 2 SW0091 Channel 18 SW0082 Channel 3 SW0092 Channel 19 SW0083 Channel 4 SW0093 Channel 20 SW0084 Channel 5 SW0094 Channel 21 SW0080 SW0085 Channel 6 SWO0095 Channel 22 to Execution status SW0086 Channel 7 SW0096 Channel 23 REMFR REMTO SWO09F SW0087 Channel 8 SW0097 Channel 24 SW0088 Channel 9 SW0098 Channel 25 SW0089 Channel 10 SWO0099 Channel 26 SWO008A Channel 11 SWO09A Channel 27 SWO008B Channel 12 SWOO9B Channel 28 SWO008C Channel 13 SWO009C Channel 29 SWO008D Channel 14 SWOO9D Channel 30 SWOO8E Channel 15 SWOOQE Channel 31 SWO008F Channel 16 SWOO9F Channel 32 Stores the baton pass
205. ly when a slave station meeting the following conditions has been selected in Network Status The slave station supports station number setting from the master station A station number has not been set to the slave station ee When a station set in Network Configuration Settings is added the external device connected to the slave station outputs data input from the master station simultaneously with configuration of the station number setting Therefore set the CPU module to STOP or check that outputs from the external device will not cause a problem beforehand Click this button to check error details Take corrective actions following description displayed i in Error Factor and Troubleshooting Selected Station Communication Status Monitor T status of cables connected to PORT1 and PORT2 Properly connected A Error cable disconnection A H o Error other than cable disconnection EN icon the information of the extension module connected to the remote device station Note 2 Note 1 For how to clear the station number set for a slave station in the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics refer to the manuals for modules used on slave stations Note 2 To display the information of an extension module a Simple Motion module with a serial number first five digits of 15092 or later is required Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Communication pape This item cannot be set f
206. may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative 12 11 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics p of the programming tool D041H Incorrect number of stations A e If the number of slave stations per network is more than 120 reduce it to 120 or less A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures DO80H to D084H Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e If the own station or target station is disconnected from the network DOAOH Transient data transmission identify the cause of the disconnection and take action response wait timeout e When the target station is overloaded and cannot receive transient data reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly DOA1H Transient data transmission e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation completion wait timeout The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be fau
207. module that has functions other than input and output such as an A D module converter module and D A converter module A generic term for devices such as personal computers that support IP Internet Protocol Ethernet device AR communications A station that controls the entire network This station can perform cyclic transmission and Network module Master station i er z E F transient transmission with all stations Only one master station can be used in a network Remote I O station A station that exchanges I O signals bit data with the master station by cyclic transmission A station that exchanges l O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by Remote device station cyclic transmission This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station A station that exchanges I O signals bit data and I O data word data with another station by Intelligent device station cyclic transmission This station responds to a transient transmission request from another station and also issues a transient transmission request to another station Servo amplifier drive DON 8 a p it Abbreviation for CC Link IE Field Network compatible servo amplifier drive unit uni Slave station A generic term for remote I O station remote device station and intelligent device station Synchronous A generic term for a servo amplifier and a slave station set to synchronous communication communicatio
208. multaneously When executing multiple link dedicated instructions simultaneously make sure that the channels for the instructions are not duplicated Link dedicated instructions with the same channel cannot be executed simultaneously To use the same channel for multiple link dedicated instructions execute one after completion of another The completion status of the dedicated instruction can be checked by the completion device of the dedicated instruction a b d Channel A channel is an area of a network module where data handled by a link dedicated instruction is stored By using multiple channels it is possible to simultaneously access from the own station to other stations or concurrently read from and write to the same network module Number of channels The Simple Motion module has 2 channels that can be used for link dedicated instructions By using 2 channels simultaneously two instructions can be executed at the same time Note 1 Note 1 For the REMFR REMTO instruction up to 32 channels can be used Number of link dedicated instructions that can be simultaneously executed Even when channels are not duplicated do not simultaneously execute link dedicated instructions exceeding 34 If the number of instructions exceeds 34 execute the instructions one by one Application example of channels e Simultaneous access to other stations from the own station Use a different own station channel for each request destination Sta
209. n 4 The status data of the link devices RY and RWw of the slave station are output to the external device Input from the slave station 5 The status data of the external device are stored in the link devices RX and RWr of the slave station 6 The status data of the link devices RX and RWr of the slave station are stored in the link devices RX and RWr of the master station by link scan 7 The status data of the link devices RX and RWr of the master station are stored in the devices of the CPU module by link refresh 3 Setting method The link devices can be assigned in the network configuration settings Refer to Section 7 4 The link refresh is assigned by the Refresh Parameters Refer to Section 7 6 8 3 2 Link refresh Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS Data can be automatically transferred between the link devices of the Simple Motion module and the devices of the CPU module CPU Simple Motion module module 1 Link refresh Concept of the link refresh range The area range set with the refresh parameters and also specified in the network configuration settings is executed by link refresh CPU module Simple Motion module Device Link device refresh range the network configuration setting Actual link Link refresh t Range set in Range set by Link refresh refresh parameters Link refresh Shortening the link refresh time and transmission delay time Use the following methods
210. n The execution status completion or error of the REMTO instruction can be checked using the following device specified for the setting data Completion device D It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the REMTO instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the REMTO instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the REMTO instruction fails 10 45 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d REMTO instruction execution timing e When completed asa A H a 4 I I 1 i REMTO i i 1 I Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 ENDO END I i i i i i i I i I 1 I I l 1 1 1 Write command A 1 1 1 1 1 Write completion device i A i i Device specified in D l AF 1 I 1 1 1 1 Own station CPU 1 I 1 1 1 Write completion device L 1 scan gt i Device of D 1 OFF i i i 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 1 I Setting data 1 1 1 1 1 Information specified in l i n3 n4 n5 CEE UN Ee 3 po I I 1 1 1 l l 1 1 Write data storage device i i Device specified in S DOn iS I 1 I 1 A AS o As a es A e a a ai 1 ii a iin es 4 1 1 E i 1 Simple Motion module i 1 Channel 1 i i A A o a a ia J 1 i i Head module 1 1 a a a 1 i i Gee i a a e a a Seek eee eS J 10 46 Own station CPU Simple Motion module 3
211. n CPU module D304H Synchronous communication error eat s If block data assurance per station is valid shorten the scan time of the programmable controller For how to shorten the scan time refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used If the synchronization is not required in the system do not use block data assurance per station e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D602H to D607H Parameter error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D608H to D609H Parameter error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D60DH to D610H Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the value in the size of the link device in the slave station s Parameter error device range f r D611H setting data and retry the operation assignment error RWw ae e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the value
212. n as well Two methods are available for the network configuration settings as listed in the following table Setting on the graphical window CC IE Field configuration window Setting on the window in the table format The network configuration can be set while checking the CC Link IE Field Network configuration graphically Slave stations are added by selecting the model name displayed on the window therefore a setting error in the station type can be prevented Setting the configuration of the slave station in the master station Refer to Section 7 4 1 a e Change Transmission Path Method Refer to Section 7 4 1 b Supplementary Setting Refer to Section 7 4 1 c Equal assignment and identical point assignment of link points Refer to Section 7 4 1 d Unlike the setting on the window in the table format the following processes can be performed Parameter processing of a slave station Refer to Section 7 4 1 e Command execution of a slave station Refer to Section 7 4 1 f The CC Link IE Field Network configuration is set manually The station type is also set manually Unlike the setting on the graphical window CC IE Field configuration window the network configuration is not displayed graphically Refer to Section 7 4 2 Note 1 The network configuration settings can be set only for the master station 1 1 Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Setting on the graphica
213. n device mode Asynchronous y ae wer f A generic term for a slave station set to other than synchronous communication mode communication device A station reserved for future use This station is not actually connected but counted as a Reserved station connected station y at A function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same network Cyclic transmission AS using link devices RX RY RWw and RWr vO A function of communication with another station which is used when requested by a Transient transmission dedicated instruction or GX Works2 communications consider the differences as if data were exchanged within one single network A dedicated instruction used for transient transmission with another station This instruction allows a master local module to communicate with programmable controllers on the same network CC Link IE Field Network and on other networks Ethernet CC Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET H A dedicated instruction used for transient transmission with a CC Link IE Field Network device This instruction allows a master local module to communicate with the device on the same network Process of restarting data link when a station recovers from an error A process of stopping data link if a data link error occurs A device X Y M D or others in a CPU module Link dedicated instruction CC Link dedicated instruction A device RX RY RWr or RWw in a modul
214. n error 00019 osc 2013 12 18 15 23 00 QO3UDVCPU 00020 osc 2013 12 19 10 12 59 QO3UDVCPU 00021 osc 2013 12 19 10 16 36 QO3UDVCPU 00022 osc 2013 12 19 10 38 49 QO3UDVCPU 00023 osc 2013 12 19 11 58 02 QO3UDVCPU Check the error code in CPU module z 00024 osc 2013 12 19 12 53 47 QO3UDVCPU 00017 0898 2013 12 18 14 40 49 QO3UDVCPU E 00009 ocic 2013 12 18 13 51 07 QO3UDVCPU 00011 ocae 2013 12 18 14 09 44 QO3UDVCPU 00014 ocae 2013 12 18 14 36 25 QO3UDVCPU 00001 DS1A 0000 00 00 00 00 00 QD77GF16 0000 gt Clear History Refresh Create CSV File Close 12 5 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 If data link cannot be performed even after the above operation is performed perform the following e Checking the LEDs Refer to Section 12 3 e Troubleshooting by symptom Refer to Section 12 4 2 Precautions on the Error History window The following explains the Simple Motion module errors that may be shown in the Error History window For errors of the modules other than the Simple Motion module and functionality of the error history refer to the manual for the relevant CPU module Refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals of the CPU module in use a No error history is displayed In PLC RAS of PLC Parameter check if the Module Error History Collection Intelligent Function Module is selected Module Error History Collection Intelligent Function Mo
215. n the System Monitor window of GX Works2 the LED status of the Simple Motion module and the intelligent function module switch settings can be checked 1 Open the System Monitor window Diagnostics System Monitor 2 In the upper left Main Base area select a module to be diagnosed and click the H W Information button Connection Channel List Stop Monitor Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image n Operation to Selected Module Man Base Sot 0 Gorre Detaled Infomation H W Information Diagnostics Eror History Detail Main Base Parameter I O Network No Master EER Type Point Address Station No PLC Power Power Eos Els S QoauovcPu ou QD77GF16 32Point Intelli 32Point 0000 10 Empty Empty 16Point 0020 Empty Empty 16Point 0030 Empty Empty 16Point 0040 Empty Empty 16Point 0050 Empty Empty 16Point 0060 Empty Empty Point 0070 Empty 16Point 0080 O Error O Major Error A Moderate Error Minor Error _ Q Assignment Error_ Assignment Incorrect Sat Montor Port Product infomation List System Eror History Close 3 The H W Information window opens Model Name QD 77GF16 Product 1505200000000005 p Display Format cH Cpe IM S ERR 0000 PARAM ERR 0000 PORTLLER 0
216. n the network configuration display area Actual system configuration GX Works2 Master station F Station No 0 Switching hub mf E dan Intelligent device station Station No 17 Network map display area Inteligent 17 g Ge Network map e Switching hubs ae in cascade connection display area Only one branch is displayed Actual system configuration GX Works2 Master station Switching hub j l E Switching hub Intelligent device Rai Intelligent device station Station No 17 station Station No 18 Intelligent device Intelligent device station Station No 19 station Station No 20 Network map display area Network Status 0 Ema Irteligent13 Irteigent 20 Displays a disconnected station that has been set in the network configuration settings but has not yet performed data link However even if a disconnected station had performed data link it is displayed in this area in the following cases A station that was reconnected to a network after cable disconnection insertion or power off and power on of the system and remains disconnected A disconnected station with the station icon deleted in the network map display area by clicking the Hide Disconnected Station button E Disconnected gt Th station monitor area ee Stop Monitor Hide Disconnected Station Legend Data link unps IAN
217. nd sequence scan time 2 Precautions a When Level Detect is set for Detection Method and the interrupt condition is always met Ifthe sequence scan takes much longer than the link scan since interrupt processing is activated in each link scan sequence scan time may greatly increase resulting in a watchdog timer error of the CPU module When Level Detect is set for Detection Method and the interrupt condition is always met do not use interrupt settings and correct the interrupt condition in the program Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Before executing an interrupt program Execute the El instruction in a main routine program and enable an interrupt Refer to the user s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used a HE Enable interrupt HH H Main routine program n H FENDH 10 H gt I O interrupt program RETA Interrupt pointer When multiple interrupts simultaneously occur The operation may delay When the Simple Motion module is in offline mode The Simple Motion module can send an interrupt request to the CPU module in online mode cannot send the request in offline mode Starting an interrupt program by the rising falling edge of the specified device Do not start an interrupt program using instructions such as PLS and PLF that depend on the rising falling edge of the specified devices because changes in devices might not be r
218. network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies For example the control panels can be connected through a star topology and the production lines through a line topology Chapter 1 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK 1 2 Simple Motion Modules A Simple Motion module is used to connect a servo amplifier or a MELSEC Q series programmable controller to CC Link IE Field Network The module works as a master station on CC Link IE Field Network 1 2 Simple Motion module Synchronous communication function A slave station which supports the synchronous communication function operates synchronously with the operation cycle of Simple Motion module The operation timing of multiple slave stations can be synchronized A slave station which synchronizes with a Simple Motion module supports the synchronous communication function A slave module which does not support the synchronous communication function is also connectable EAS iL Simple Motion module Slave station Slave station Slave station Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous communication communication communication function function function Supported Supported Not supported Coexistence system of I O module and driver The coexistence system of servo amplifiers and I O modules can be configured The network between drivers and I O modules can be wired by a single line and it enables wire saving
219. ng Data to Another Station This instruction writes data to the device of another station In units of words gt Start contact JPWRITE f l Start contact GP WRITE f l Available devices Setting data Internal device Intelligent function Note 1 File Index register Constant Note 1 System user module device 9 Others ist Z register vico n Note 1 Local devices and file registers set for each program cannot be used Note 2 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used When specifying SD SW data can be written in the range that the user can set For details on SD SW refer to the following Manuals for the CPU module and network module of the target station Note 3 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU a digit specified bit device can be used Example K4M16 To use digit specification the following conditions must be satisfied e The device number should be multiples of 16 10H The number of digits should be 4 K4 1 Setting data Setting data Setby Data type Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access Start I O number of the Simple Motion module of the own 16 bit binary station 00 to FEH Upper 2 digits of the I O number expressed in pee 3 digits S1 Start device of the own station where control data is stored stored A continuous area with the write data length is requ
220. nk Special Relay SB and Link Special Register SW eee 11 15 11 1 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING This chapter describes programming and startup examples of CC Link IE Field Network This chapter describes communications between the master station and a head module For other communications refer to the manual for the slave station used 11 1 Precautions for Programming This section describes precautions to create CC Link IE Field Network programs 1 Cyclic transmission program For a cyclic transmission program interlock with the following link special relay SB and link special register SW Refer to Appendix 2 and Appendix 3 Data link status own station SB0049 e Data link status each station SW00B0 to SW00B7 Example Interlock example SB49 SWOB1 0 2 Transient transmission program For a transient transmission program interlock with the following link special relay SB and link special register SW Refer to Appendix 2 and Appendix 3 e Baton pass status own station SB0047 e Baton pass status each station SWODAO to SW00A7 Example Interlock example Start contact SB47 SWO0A1 0 A RHA A Dedicated instruction to station No 173 11 2 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 11 2 Example of Communications Between the Master Station and a Head Module This section describes an example of communications where D A conversion in CH1 and CH2 of a D A converter module L60DA4 are enabled and ana
221. nment Image window Refer to Section 7 6 2 Are the refresh parameters set within correct ranges Correct the refresh parameters Overlap of a refresh target device can be checked in the Assignment Image window through GX Works2 Refer to Section 7 6 2 Is the station number of the Simple Motion module duplicated y y Change the duplicated station number with any of the other stations Is any refresh target device in the refresh parameter window overlapped with that of another network module 12 9 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 4 2 Transient transmission cannot be performed The following lists the actions to be taken if transient transmission cannot be performed with the target station and GX Works2 cannot perform monitoring Check item Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station on or If the D LINK LED is off perform troubleshooting Refer to Section 12 3 flashing 1 In the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics identify the cause of the error Is the baton pass status of the destination normal gt and take action Refer to Chapter 9 Are the following control data of the dedicated instruction correct e Target station s CPU type Correct the control data of the dedicated instruction e Target station s network number e Target station number Is the station number of the Simple Motion module duplicated any OF the otberst tions Change the duplicated station number wi y ions 1
222. ntrolled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to Section 8 1 7 in this manual Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident O Do not write any data to the system area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the CPU module to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system O To seta refresh device in the network parameter select the device Y for the remote output RY refresh device If a device other than Y such as M and L is selected the CPU module holds the device status even after its status is changed to STOP if a communication cable is disconnected the network may be unstable resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction 3 Transportation and installati
223. nts when it is used in facilities where a breakdown in the product is likely to cause a serious accident 10 General cautions A CAUTION All drawings provided in the instruction manual show the state with the covers and safety partitions removed to explain detailed sections When operating the product always return the covers and partitions to the designated positions and operate according to the instruction manual 1 2 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT O Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the P
224. number of the station in reserved station function disable status is stored in Reserved station cancel setting status SW0181 to SW0187 6 When the reserved station setting is cancelled with error an error code will be stored in Result of reserved station function disable SW0056 7 Turn off Reserved station function disable request SB0012 SW0011 to SB0012 Reserved station function disable request SWO0017 Reserved station function disable setting Reserved station function disable request accept i 7 SB005C rae SW0056 Result of reserved station function disable u Reserved station function disable completion SB005D status F SW0181 to SB0180 Reserved station function disable status SW0187 Reserved station cancel setting status 11 23 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING b Restoring reserved station setting 1 Specify the station number to restore reserved station setting in Reserved station function disable setting SW0011 to SW0017 2 Turn on Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 3 Reserved station specification enable request accept status SB005E is turned on 4 When cancellation of the reserved station specification is completed Reserved station specification enabled status SBOO5F is turned on 5 Use Reserved station cancel setting status SW0181 to SW0187 to check whether the station returned to the reserved station When the station specified as Reserved station disable status is not found
225. o CPU RUN status each station SWOOE7 CPU RUN status each station SBOOF1 CPU RUN status master station SW0100 to SB0100 CPU operation status each station SW0107 Operation status each station 1 SB0101 CPU operation status master station 1 SW0110 to SB0110 CPU operation status each station SW0117 Operation status each station 2 SB0111 CPU operation status master station 2 A re o b Checking CPU module status own station 1 Whether the CPU module is in RUN or STOP can be checked using CPU RUN status own station SB004C 2 If a continuation error occurs in the CPU module Own station s CPU status 1 SB004A turns on If a stop error occurs in the CPU module Own station s CPU status 2 SB0048B turns on 3 The CPU module status can be checked using Own station s CPU status SWO004B SB004A Own station s CPU status 1 SB004B Own station s CPU status 2 SW004B Own station s CPU status sso04C__ cpu RUN status own station ee SA A 11 21 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING 8 Dedicated instructions The following link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs are used for dedicated instructions Refer to Chapter 10 a REMFR REMTO instruction Refer to Section 10 8 Refer to Section 10 9 1 Set the following registers before executing the REMFR REMTO instructions Number of resends REMFR REMTO SW001A e Response wait timer REMFR REMTO SW001B 2 When the REMFR
226. o Programming tool Backup module Parameters used for O Note 3 synchronous control Noe2 Note 2 For details of parameters refer to the MELSEC Q L QD77MS QD77GF LD77MS LD77MH Simple Motion Module User s Manual GX Works2 Simple Motion Simple Motion 1to16 17 to 120 GX Works2 CPU module Module Setting module O Valid Invalid Synchronous Control Note 3 Parameters can be also set by a sequence program Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 2 Parameter List The following table lists CC Link IE Field Network parameters 1 Parameters set for a Simple Motion module When setting the parameters for the Simple Motion module select CC IE Field Motion Master Station in Network Type using GX Works2 The parameters for the function not supported by the Simple Motion module are disabled IX Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window AA Paes ee ee Preteens CC e OOOO O O l E 0000 Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Setifitis needed No Setting Already Set Start 1 0 No Valid Module During Other Station Access 1 Y Please input 16 point unit HEX to start I O No in which module is mounted A pa a Chapter 7_ PARAMETER SETTING Necessity of Item Network Type Start I O No Network No Total Stations 1 Network setting Reference setting Section 7 3 Station No Moe Configuration Settings Setting Supplementary Sett
227. odule 3 1 General Specifications For the general specifications of the Simple Motion module refer to MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control 3 2 Performance Specifications Performance specifications for the network function are shown below Specifications Operation cycle 0 88ms 1 77ms 3 55ms 1024 points 2KB R Maximum link points per network 1024 points 2KB excluding a servo amplifier RX 8192 points 1KB RWr 1024 points 2KB Maximum link points per station 8192 points 1KB RY 8192 points 1KB l l l 1024 points 2KB Maximum number of send points per station F 8192 points 1KB Communication speed 1Gbps Line topology and star topology Coexistence of line topology and star topology is possible An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE T standard Category 5e or higher double shielded STP straight cable Refer to Section 5 2 1 Network topology Connection cable 100m max Compliant with ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e Ethernet part Refer to MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Maximum station to station distance Ae Positioning Control Line topology 12000m when cables are connected to one master station Overall cable distance and 120 slave stations Star topology Depends on the system configuration Number of cascade Up to 20 follows hub performance connections Servo amplifier 16 modules Number of connectable F Slave station
228. omotor used in a system must be compatible with the module servo amplifier and servomotor Install a cover on the shaft so that the rotary parts of the servomotor are not touched during operation There may be some cases where holding by the electromagnetic brakes is not possible due to the life or mechanical structure when the ball screw and servomotor are connected with a timing belt etc Install a stopping device to ensure safety on the machine side 2 Parameter settings and programming AN DANGER Set the parameter values to those that are compatible with the module servo amplifier servomotor and regenerative resistor model and the system application The protective functions may not function if the settings are incorrect The regenerative resistor model and capacity parameters must be set to values that conform to the operation mode and servo amplifier The protective functions may not function if the settings are incorrect Set the mechanical brake output and dynamic brake output validity parameters to values that are compatible with the system application The protective functions may not function if the settings are incorrect O Set the stroke limit input validity parameter to a value that is compatible with the system application The protective functions may not function if the setting is incorrect O Set the servomotor encoder type increment absolute position type etc parameter to a value that is compatible
229. ompletion status S1 1 is Channel in use error codes D25AH and D25BH data is not stored 10 25 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Start device of the own station where data to be written is stored Specify the start device of the own station that stores data to be written c Start device of the target station where data is to be written If the device setting in PLC Parameter is different between the own and target stations use D1 with double quotation marks to specify Specify the start device D1 of the target station within the available range so that the write data can be stored Example When the area addressed D150 or higher of the target station is already used Good example Bad example D50 is specified in D1 D100 is specified in D1 Own station CPU Target station Own station CPU Target station DO vs DO r 5 e 100 words D50 100 words O D99 D99 di A D100 D149 K D150 D150 D199 Data to be write with WRITE instruction LC Area already used by the target station m Duplicated area 10 26 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Function a WRITE instruction overview The instruction writes data by the specified number of words control data S1 9 from the own station start device S2 into the target station word devices after D1 Specify the target stations in control data S1 4 and S1 5 When the writing to devices of the target station is completed the comple
230. on AN DANGER Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Z CAUTION Transport the product with the correct method according to the mass Use the servomotor suspension bolts only for the transportation of the servomotor Do not transport the servomotor with machine installed on it O Do not stack products past the limit When transporting the module or servo amplifier never hold the connected wires or cables O When transporting the servomotor never hold the cables shaft or detector When transporting the module or servo amplifier never hold the front case as it may fall off When transporting installing or removing the module or servo amplifier never hold the edges Install the unit according to the instruction manual in a place where the mass can be withstood O Do not get on or place heavy objects on the product Always observe the installation direction Keep the designated clearance between the module or servo amplifier and control panel inner surface or the module and servo amplifier module or servo amplifier and other devices O Do not install or operate modules servo amplifiers or servomotors that are damaged or that have missing parts O Do not block the intake outtake ports of the servo amplifier and servomotor with cooling fan Do not allow conduc
231. on No 17 Error zi ro Station Monitoring ott Moritor Stop Monitor Total Slave Stations EXE EEE AE CRETE St No 19 Total Slave Stations Set In Parameter E y L L L I I I Inteligent 17 Inteligent 18 a Y Emm cocoon TNT a 5 Check the transient communication route from the connected lt J station to the destination station Station No 17 Eror Mode Online p Check the communication route whether you can reach yi gt N 3 communication target station from the specified station q MAC Adressan amna 148 1 Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station i Module Error 1 Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link I A 2 Information Confirmation Set i L Network Event History Access the network the event history log L 4 AO keserved Station View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable l PORTZ Cable Dacomected Function Enable reserved stations I x be View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily l fea ignore station errors 1 1 Selected Station Operation i l CPU status of the selected station can be checked by starting 5 Sistem Montor _ system monitor of the selected station i 1 o Change the operation state run reset stop etc of the Remote Operation E 4 Chapter 9 _CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS DO The icon of the servo amplifier displays Other Dis
232. on where control data is stored a b c S2 Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored Device name 01 Start device of the own station where read data is stored A continuous area for the read data length is required System Bit Control data Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon completion of the instruction D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails The SREAD instruction control data is the same as that of the READ instruction Refer to Section 10 4 Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored The target station s start device where data to be read by the SREAD instruction is stored is the same as that of the READ instruction Refer to Section 10 4 Start device of the own station where read data is stored The start device of the own station where data read by the SREAD instruction is stored is the same as that of the READ instruction Refer to Section 10 4 Device of the target station which is turned on for 1 scan upon completion of the instruction Data reading from another station can be confirmed 10 17 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Function a SREAD instruction overview The instruction reads data by the specified number of words control data S1 9 from the target station start device S2 into the own station word devices after D1 Specify the target stations in control data S1 4 and S1
233. oncnnnnanncnincnnncanncn rc 8 19 9 4 Transient Trans MISSION tia a dad 8 20 8 4 1 Communications within the same network o ciiconinnicnnnnnnconconconcancanccnrcn rc 8 20 8 5 Reserved Station Specification and Temporary Cancel of Reserved Station Setting 8 21 8 6 Interrupt Request to the CPU Module cc ccccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeneeseaeescaeeecaeeesaeeseaeessaeessueesieeesineesans 8 22 9 1 Diagnostic Nemo ein a eae aaa hae bhai 9 2 9 2 Starting Diagnostics virilidad 9 4 9 3 Diagnostic Wind Witt AA a 9 8 OA EMK Start Stop O 9 16 9 5 Network Event History cad 9 19 9 6 Reserved Station Function Enable ceceecceeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaeesaeesaeeseesaeeseesaeeseesitesireseeeatesas 9 22 9 7 Remote Operation ange ean a a aai a a a aaia ae a E e a ee a aa aa a aae aa aaa a aade aaa aaa aaa 9 26 10 1 List of Dedicated Instructions 0 2 2 0 eccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeceeaeeseaeeesanessneescaeeseaeessanesesaeeesieetenseetans 10 2 10 2 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions ooonnocnnicnninnninnnnnnncnnonnccnncann carac arn narrar rara 10 4 10 2 1 Precautions for dedicated instructions COMMON oonoccncnnciniconnconnconncnocn nora n nr nora r arc r arar 10 4 10 2 2 Precautions for link dedicated instructions oonnonninninnnnnnnnnnnnonconconca cnc 10 5 10 3 Understanding the Documentation on Dedicated Instructions oonnoonnicnninninnconconcononnccnrcnrcnnnnn 10 6 10 4
234. onductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine chlorine bromine and iodine are used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects they cause malfunction when entering our products Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enter our products or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation heat method Additionally disinfect and protect wood from insects before packing products The module and the servo amplifier must not be used with parts which contain halogen series flame retardant materials such as bromine under coexisting conditions 4 Wiring AN DANGER Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction AXCAUTION Correctly and securely wire the wires Reconfirm the connections for mistakes and the terminal screws for tightness after wiring Failing to do so may lead to run away of the servomotor O After wiring install the protective covers such as the terminal covers to the original positions Do not install a phase advancing capacitor surge absorber or radio noise filter option FR BIF on the output side of the servo amplifier Correctly connect the output side terminal U V W Incorre
235. op Monitor Print Product Information List System Error History Close Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 3 When the following window opens select the Simple Motion module to be diagnosed and click the OK button to start the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Modules are listed in the order configured in network settings Refer to Section 7 3 CCIE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Module Selection Module 1 Network No 1 Master Station Station No 0 Module 2 Network No 2 Local Station Station No 1 Cnel When multiple Simple Motion modules of the same network number are mounted on the same base unit the module with the smallest start I O number is always diagnosed regardless of setting 4 Select the station to be diagnosed from Select Station or Network Status amp or is displayed on the module icon of the station where an error occurs A disconnected station that had performed data link is indicated with the icon in the network map display area A disconnected station that has been set in the network configuration settings but has not yet performed data link is displayed on the right end of the area However even if a disconnected station had performed data link it is displayed on the right end of the area in the following cases e A station that was reconnected to a network after cable disconnection insertion or powe
236. or an LCPU a digit specified bit device can be used Example K4M16 To use digit specification the following conditions must be satisfied The device number should be multiples of 16 10H The number of digits should be 4 K4 Handling of the device to use for setting Descriptions of data and control data setting data and data type Setting data Description Own stations network No 1 to 239 254 User Data is set by the user before an 254 Network specie in Vaid Module During Other A aa Station Access each instruction is executed Start VO number of the Simple Motion module of the own 16 bit binary ction System Execution result of each A instruction is stored by the CPU module Start device ofthe own station were control data is sored Refer to Section 10 4 1 a Start device of the target station where data to be readies sored Refer to Secton 10 4 1 9 Star device ofthe oum station where read data s sored IA continuous area for the read data length is required Reter to Section 10 4 1 6 Device ofthe owm station which is tumed on fort scan lupon completion of the instruction 02 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fail 10 6 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS e Instruction execution conditions include the following types On the rising edge On the falling edge e The following types of devices are used for the dedicated instructions on CC Link IE
237. or persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative 12 14 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e Retry the operation after a while SLMP transmission failed e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative D23AH Subheader error in SLMP Correct the subheader information at the request source and retry the transmission operation Network No error in SLMP Correct the network number information at the request source and retry D23BH transmission i the operation D23CH Station No error in SLMP Correct the station number information at the request source and retry the transmission operation The slave information acquisition request by the CC Link IE Field configuration setting of the programming tool is incorrect Close the CC IE Field Configuration Setting window and request it again Request data error in SLMP transmission D23DH to D23EH D240H Target network No error dedicated Correct the network number at the request source of the dedicated In instruction and eye the operation instruction instruction and retry the operation instruction instruction and retry the z Operation e Used tan the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation D244H Incorrect transient data e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representativ
238. or the Simple Motion module Test button IP Communication a f This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module Test button Cable Test 7 This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module button Link Start Stop ae Starts or stops cyclic transmission Refer to Section 9 4 button Network Event E j Displays event history of a network Refer to Section 9 5 History button Information Confirmation Set Selected Station Operation Reserved Station Temporarily cancels a reservation for a slave station or reserves the slave station again Refer to Function Enable E Section 9 6 button Enable Disable Ignore Station This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module Errors button System Monitor Displays the System Monitor window Refer to Section 12 2 button Remote Performs the remote operations RESET operation only to the CPU module Refer to Section Operation button 9 7 2 If a is displayed in Network Status e The network is configured in ring topology Take the following measures 1 Disconnect one Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power off and then on the hub Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network 2 When data link starts across the entire network check the network map using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 9 4 Link Start
239. ores the RWw value The RWw start number and number of points for each station No can be checked by the RWw offset size information Un G63568 to Un G63775 Refer to Appendix 1 4 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Un G60416 RVWwO Un G60417 RWw1 os l Un G61439 RWw3FF Appendix 2 Appendices 4 Remote register RWr Un G61440 to Un G62463 This buffer memory stores the RWr value The RWr start number and number of points for each station No can be checked by the RWr offset size information Un G63776 to Un G63983 Refer to Appendix 1 5 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Un G61440 RWr0 Un G61441 RWr1 Un G62463 RWr3FF 5 Link special relay SB Un G62464 to Un G62495 This buffer memory stores the SB value Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of SB b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Un G62464 UmGe2495 SB SB SB sB ss sB ss se se se se se sB sB sB sB n 1FF 1FE 1FD 1FC 1FB 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1F2 1F1 1FO 6 Link special register SW Un G62496 to Un G63007 This buffer memory stores the SW value b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Un G62496 swo Un G62497 ae Un G63007 SW1FF Appendix 3 Appendices Appendix 1 2 RX offset size information Un G63152 to Un G63359 T
240. ork ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeetaes 8 20 8 5 Reserved Station Specification and Temporary Cancel of Reserved Station Setting oooioniinniniiicnicn iii 8 21 8 6 Interrupt Request to the CPU Module cccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeesaeereneeetans 8 22 Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the network functions of the Simple Motion module 8 1 Fixed Cycle Communication The communication cycle of the Simple Motion module is fixed cycle The communication is performed with slave modules in a cycle set in the operation cycle setting 8 2 Synchronous Communication Function A slave module which supports the synchronous communication function operates synchronously with the operation cycle of the Simple Motion module the communication cycle of CC Link IE Field Network Therefore the operation timing between the Simple Motion module and each slave module can be synchronized A slave module which does not support the synchronous communication function is also connectable However the operation is not synchronized with the operation cycle of the Simple Motion module Therefore the operation timing of the slave module is not synchronized with the Simple Motion module ge LY FA AA i ZA Simple Motion module Slave station 1 Slave station 16 Slave station 17 Slave station 18 Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous communicat
241. ormal communica 0837 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status 0836 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0835 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0834 2013 12 18 15 22 59 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0833 2013 12 18 15 22 58 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0832 2013 12 18 14 48 48 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0831 2013 12 18 14 48 47 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0830 2013 12 18 14 48 45 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0829 2013 12 18 14 48 44 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0828 2013 12 18 14 47 56 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0827 2013 12 18 14 47 55 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0826 2013 12 18 14 47 53 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0825 2013 12 18 14 47 52 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0824 2013 12 18 14 45 49 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0823 2013 12 18 14 45 48 Master Station lt
242. ot execute reserved station specification and temporary cancel of reserved station setting When the operation of reserved station function enable is executed for the synchronous communication devices Not support function execution error error code D300H occurs When the reserved stations are set for the synchronous communication devices and asynchronous communication devices at the same time the operation of reserved station function enable is executed for the asynchronous communication devices only Reserved station setting is invalid for the synchronous communication devices Therefore the operation of reserved station function enable cannot be executed 1 Selecting the target module in Network Status a Temporarily canceling a reservation 1 Connect a slave station specified as a reserved station to the network 2 Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module 3 Start the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics 4 In Network Status right click the icon of the station for which reservation is to be cancelled Click Reserved Station Function Disable In Selected Station The text background turns orange The reservation for the slave station is temporarily cancelled 5 Debug the slave station that has been added Total Slave Stations 3 Total Slave Stations 2 Current Link 0 Number of Station 1 Set In Parameter Connected Scan Time mS Errors Detected nnected St Maste
243. play of network map and error status 4 Modules Display of disconnected cable and disconnected station Section 9 3 Display of selected station status and 2 error details Slave station number setting a a Invalid because the communication test is not Communication Test x supported yt ot Invalid because the IP communication test is IP Communication Test x not supported 3 Invalid because the cable test is not Cable Test x supported y Invalid because the station No 1 to 16 cannot y Link Start Stop f Section 9 4 start stop data link Network Event History Section 9 5 Invalid b the station No 1 to 16 t Reserved Station Function Enable DN ERAUS os Section 9 6 set reserved stations Enable Disable Ignore Station Errors The operation of setting canceling is invalid EEN p System Monitor E aa Remote Operation STA OE Only RESET operation is supported Section 9 7 O Diagnosed A Diagnosed with restrictions Xx Not diagnosed Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 9 2 Starting Diagnostics This section describes how to use the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 1 Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module If a slave station cannot be monitored due to an error such as cable disconnection directly connect the supported programming tool to the slave station 2 Start the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics When another station has be
244. r regenerative resistor and servomotor etc while the power is ON and for a short time after the power is turned OFF In this timing these parts become very hot and may lead to burns O Always turn the power OFF before touching the servomotor shaft or coupled machines as these parts may lead to injuries O Do not go near the machine during test operations or during operations such as teaching Doing so may lead to injuries 4 Various precautions Strictly observe the following precautions Mistaken handling of the unit may lead to faults injuries or electric shocks 1 System structure A CAUTION O Always install a leakage breaker on the module and servo amplifier power source O If installation of an electromagnetic contactor for power shut off during an error etc is specified in the instruction manual for the servo amplifier etc always install the electromagnetic contactor Install the emergency stop circuit externally so that the operation can be stopped immediately and the power shut off Use the module servo amplifier servomotor and regenerative resistor with the correct combinations listed in the instruction manual Other combinations may lead to fire or faults Use the CPU module base unit and Simple Motion module with the correct combinations listed in the instruction manual Other combinations may lead to faults O if safety standards ex robot safety rules etc apply to the system using the module
245. r 0 Intelligent 17 Intelligent 18 P1 A m n hs ne Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station Reserved Station Function Disable In Selected Station gt Station No Setting Communication Test IP Communication Test Cable Test Link Start Stop Operation Test Network Event History 7 z F Ch Reserved Station Function Enable Enable Disable Ignore Station Errors System Monitor the Remote Operation Link Start Stop startorsos HERE ESE TAC Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS b Reserving the slave station again 1 In Network Status right click the icon of the station to be reserved again Click Reserved Station Function Disable In Selected Station The text background turns light blue The slave station is reserved again Network Status E Total Slave Stations 3 Total Slave Stations 2 Current Link 0 Number of Station 0 Set In Parameter Connected Scan Time MS Errors Detected Master 0 Intelligent 17 Intelligent 18 P1 b OS Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station Y Reserved Station Function Disable In Selected Station y Station No Setting Communication Test IP Communication Test Cable Test Link Start Stop Network Event History Operation Test ork Event History Reserved Station Function Enable Enable Disable Ignore Station Errors System Monitor
246. r Station Q series We seres Intelligent Device Station Inteligent Device Station Communication head module Ethernet adapter module CC Link IE Field E Inteligent Device Station Network Interface Board Gor Intelligent Device Station Remote Device Station CC Link bridge module Other Modules Background Color for Station Type Turquoise Reserved Station Yellow Errors Temporarily Being Ignored Orange Reserved Station Disabled Activated Grey Errors Always Ignored Red Sub Master Station for Master Station is running Legend button Station Status Error Data link stopped Disconnected Station Error Minor Selected Station Error Moderate A 1 Module Error Eror Major Display an error icon at the right of station icon o o PLC Error Error Parameter Display an error icon at the left of station icon Error Station type mismatch Error at Slave Station Display an error icon at the left of station icon 2 Station No Unassigned 7 Error illegal loop connection detected Cable Status o Total Slave Stations Displays the total number of slave stations set by parameter Set In Parameter Total Slave Stations _ F 0 F A Displays the total number of slave stations during data link on CC Link IE Field Network Connected Network Status Current Link Scan Displays 0 i E Time pay Number of Station Displays the number of error stations in the
247. r off and power on of the system and remains disconnected e A disconnected station with the station icon deleted in the network map display area by clicking the Hide Disconnected Station button W is displayed on the icon of a cable where a communication error occurs To check the details of the communication error click the neighboring stations of SE e 42 js displayed if the network is configured in ring topology Disconnected station Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS e Descriptions of icons Click the Legend button A brief description of the icon is displayed OS Stop Monitor Hide Disconnected Staten E Datatinkcunpes e When multiple Simple Motion modules are mounted on the same base unit Clicking the Change Module button will change the target module Click CCIE Field Diagnostics Diagnostics Destination SA s Module Module 1 Network No 1 Change Module al Station No 0 z EEr Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station 3 Connected 2 Scan Time O ms Errors Detected o Total Slave Stations Set In Parameter Stations that cannot be selected as a diagnostic target In the following cases the status of the corresponding station cannot be checked using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics e The network number of the station differs from those of other stations e More than one master station exists in the network The sta
248. r station SB00B1 Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores if a reserved station has been set OFF No setting ON Set When a reserved station has been set each station status can be checked using Reserved Reserved station station setting status SW00C1 to SW00C7 setting status Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Reserved station setting status SWO00C1 to SW00C7 may be offset by one sequence scan SB00CO Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Appendix 12 SBOOFO CPU RUN status each station Appendices Description Stores the RUN status of each station s CPU module OFF All stations are in RUN or STEP RUN status ON Station in STOP or PAUSE status found If a station in STOP or PAUSE status is found the status of each station can be checked by the CPU RUN status each station SWOOFO to SWOOF7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of CPU RUN status each station SWOOFO to SWOOF7 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SBOOF 1 CPU RUN status master station Stores the RUN status of the master station s CPU module OFF RUN or STEP RUN status ON STOP or PAUSE status Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off SB0100
249. rable momenta A y According to each instruction manual power failure 7 Corrective actions for errors A CAUTION If an error occurs in the self diagnosis of the module or servo amplifier confirm the check details according to the instruction manual and restore the operation if a dangerous state is predicted in case of a power failure or product failure use a servomotor with electromagnetic brakes or install a brake mechanism externally Use a double circuit construction so that the electromagnetic brake operation circuit can be operated by emergency stop signals set externally Shut off with the Shut off with servo ON signal OFF emergency stop alarm electromagnetic brake signal signal EMG Servo motor EMG RAI PR Electromagnetic Q brakes If an error occurs remove the cause secure the safety and then resume operation after alarm release The unit may suddenly resume operation after a power failure is restored so do not go near the machine Design the machine so that personal safety can be ensured even if the machine restarts suddenly 8 Maintenance inspection and part replacement ZADANGER Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the module fixing screw Failure to do so may result in electric shock
250. rce and retry the D213H Transient data command error op ration ion D214H Transient data length error Correct the data length at the request source and retry the operation D215H Transient data request error Change the mode to Online and retry the operation Correct the request command at the request source and retry the D216H to D217H Transient data command error operation ion D218H Incorrect number of read write Correct the number of read write device data at the request source and transient data retry the operation D219H Transient data attribute code error Correct the attribute code at the request source and retry the operation D21AH Transient data access code error Correct the access code at the request source and retry the operation e Abnormal transient data were issued from the CPU module e Replace the CPU module and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Correct the request command at the request source and retry the D222H Transient data command error operation ion e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool Transient error e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly D21BH to D21CH Transient data request error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Although change of the target stat
251. rding to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action Refer to Section 12 5 4 Program example The following program is for reading data of W250 to W254 of station No 17 target station into D700 to D704 of station No 0 own station when M101 is turned on a System configuration Station No 0 Station No 17 READ instruction CPU module Simple Motion READ instruction Head module request source module request target Own station g D700 Target station D701 D702 D703 D704 Network No 1 b Devices used in the program example Link special relay SB link special register SW Baton pass status each station of SB0047 Baton pass status own station SWO00A1 0 S station No 17 e Devices used by the user M100 Control data setting command D200 to D217 Control data M101 Start contact D700 to D704 Read data storage device station No 0 M105 Completion device ene status indication M106 ene For details on link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to Appendix 2 and Appendix 3 10 14 M100 itt c Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS READ instruction setting The setting of READ instruction control data is as follows S1 0 D200 Abnormal end type 0081H Sets data for abnormal end Setting is not required because it is set by the system D201 Completion status S1 Channels used by own S1 D202 station em _ 13 nes os
252. red in BCD format Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally completed S1 12 to S1 15 S1 12 Month 01H to 12H Year 00H to 99H last 2 digits System S1 13 Hour 00H to 23H Day 01H to 31H S1 14 Second 00H to 59H Minute 00H to 59H S1 15 Year OOH to 99H first 2 digits Day of week 00H to 06H 00H Sun to 06H Sat When the target station is QnACPU OOH is stored in the year the first two digits of the year The network No of the station in which an error was detected is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the Error detected 3 4 area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 S1 16 station s network i ee System No Note 1 The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally i completed 1 to 239 Network No The station number of the station in which an error was detected is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the Error detected area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 S1 17 station number The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally System Moe completed Master station 125 7DH Intelligent device station 1 to 120 Note 1 If C
253. refers to the signals input from the Simple Motion module to the CPU module and device Y refers to the signals output from the CPU module to the Simple Motion module Signal name Use prohibited a Use prohibited 4 5 6 7 8 9 B C D E 1 1 1 4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 YA YB YC YD YE Y Y Y Module READY YF Y10 Ler le YG Oy ya META Ye va y YE F OO Y X10 i vio Ax EA X X XI X X X X X X X X X X X Chapter 3_ SPECIFICATIONS Important Y2 to YF and X2 to XE are used by the system and cannot be used by the user If these devices are used the operation of the QD77GF16 will not be guaranteed 3 4 2 Details of input signals QD77GF CPU module The ON OFF timing and conditions of the input signals are shown below Refer to the MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control for signals not listed in the table below Details XF Module READY OFF The signal to confirm the module operation ready status Module operation e After the power is turned from OFF to ON this signal turns from disabled OFF to ON when the module is normal If the module is in error ON this signal turns from ON to OFF Module operation Normal enabled PLC READY signal Y0 OFF READY signal XO OFF Module READY IXF OFF f Power supply ON Error PLC READY signal YO OFF READY signal X0 OFF ON Module READY IXF OFF Power suppl
254. representative e Increase the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station or target station detected an error identify the Arrival check error dedicated instruction D251H cause of the error and take action e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation e Check if the switching hub and the cables at the request source are connected properly e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool e Increase the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation Transmission completion wait gt e e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation timeout dedicated instruction e Correct the number of link dedicated instructions that is simultaneously executed within the range Refer to Section 10 2 2 1 c e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics of the programming tool e Increase the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation Response timer timeout dedicated a ee e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and retry the operation instruction Correct the number of link dedicated instructions that is
255. request source Own station Channel 4 ad 99 63H Network No 1 Start I O number 0020H b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB link special register SW Baton pass status each station of SB0047 Baton pass status own station SWO00A1 0 3 station No 17 e Devices used by users For details on link special relay SB and link special register SW refer to Appendix 2 and Appendix 3 c Program example The following program is written in the CPU module of station No 0 M115 SB47 SWO0OA1 0 1 if AF Ko gt KO gt H2ZP REMTO J1 K4 K17 H2 HO D850 K100 M116 Execution of M116 M117 E E E EE cascos a REMTO instruction M117 A RN A 10 48 Chapter 11_ PROGRAMMING Chapter 11 PROGRAMMING 11 1 Precautions for Programming cecccecceeceeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaeeeeeteneeeaes 11 2 11 2 Example of Communications Between the Master Station and a Head Module 11 3 11 2 1 System configuration example eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeateeas 11 3 11 2 2 Setting in the master Station 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeas 11 5 11 2 3 Setting in the head MOUIC eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeeeas 11 7 11 2 4 Checking the network Status 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeeeas 11 10 11 2 5 Program CxAMple 2 00 A 11 11 11 3 Using Li
256. resentative 12 20 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the value in the station type setting data and retry the D628H Parameter error station type error operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again e Correct the value in the station No setting data within 1 to 120 and Parameter error station No range D629H anon retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D62AH Parameter error data link faulty e Correct the data link faulty station setting and retry the operation station setting error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D62BH Parameter error output status Correct the output status setting for CPU STOP and retry the operation setting for CPU STOP error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D62CH Parameter error interrupt setting e Correct the interrupt settings and retry the operation error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative
257. rite notification device D3 of the target station is turned on the data of W300 to W303 are stored in D500 to D503 Compared to the WRITE instruction program example the SWRITE instruction program example has a different section where the write notification device D3 is specified at the end of the arguments Refer to Section 10 6 4 10 37 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a System configuration Same as the WRITE instruction program example b Devices used in the program example e Link special relay SB link special register SW Same as the WRITE instruction program example e Devices used by users The devices used in the SWRITE instruction request source station No 0 are the same as those in WRITE instruction program example Device used in the SWRITE instruction request destination station No 18 s E y D500 to Devices that store the data of W300 to Y117 Write notification device D503 W303 c SWRITE instruction setting Same as the WRITE instruction program example d Program example Program example in SWRITE instruction request source station No 0 M110 i itt MOV H81 D220 J MOV K2 D222 J MOV HO D223 J MOV K1 D224 J Control data setting for MOM eae D229 SWRITE instruction MOV KO D226 J MOV KO D228 J MOV K4 0229 4 MOV KO D230 M111 t MOV K10 D750 MOV K20 D751 Stores write data in Mov K30 D752 y D750 to D753 MOV K40
258. rom another station e Station where link was stopped by link special relay SB or link special register SW Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Selecting Forced Link Start will start the link Cyclic transmission can be started and stopped using link special relays SBs and link special registers SWs Refer to Section 11 3 Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 9 5 Network Event History The history of events occurred in the own station and in the network can be displayed When the master station is the target module event history of the entire network can be displayed The history data are useful for troubleshooting at the start of the network system 1 Displaying event history 1 Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module 2 Start the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics from the menu Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics 3 Click the Network Event History button in the CC IE Field Diagnostics window Or right click a module icon in Network Status and click Network Event History The Network Event History window opens Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 Network Event History List Detailed Information contents a Item lt lt Own St gt gt Status chan 2013 12 19 09 11 19 Master Station PERES Baton pass status 0838 2013 12 19 09 11 17 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down Cause of baton pass interrup N
259. ror causes corrective actions and event history can be Chapter 9 checked in GX Works2 The error information occurred in the Simple Motion module is notified and Module error collection function accumulated Then the confirmation of error information and troubleshooting Section 12 2 can be executed using GX Works2 5 Other functions The reserved stations are included in the number of stations that will be connected to the network in the future without actually connecting them Reserved station specification j Reserved stations are not detected as faulty stations even though they are Section 8 5 not actually connected Section 9 6 Temporary cancel of the reserved Reserved station specification can be temporarily cancelled without changing station setting the parameters Interrupt conditions are checked every link scan and if the interrupt Interrupt request to a CPU module conditions are met an interrupt request is made to the CPU module to start the interrupt program Chapter 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 4 Specifications of Input Output Signals with CPU Module 3 4 1 List of input output signals with CPU module The Simple Motion module uses 32 input points and 32 output points for exchanging data with the CPU module The input output signals when the head I O number of Simple Motion module is set to OH are shown below If it is set to other than OH change the I O number according to setting of head I O number Device X
260. rts over the network 2 When data link starts over the network check the network configuration by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to Chapter 9 Is the station number of the Simple Motion module duplicated f s a Change the duplicated station number with any of the other stations 12 7 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 The ERR LED turns on Connect GX Works2 to the CPU module mounted with the Simple Motion module whose ERR LED is on identify the cause of the error and take action Refer to Section 12 2 lis the network parameter incorrect 3 The ERR LED is flashing Check item Is the disconnected station displayed in the network map Perform the troubleshooting shown in When the D LINK LED turned off or display area of the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics is flashing Refer to 1 If the above action does not solve the problem Total Stations set in the Network Parameter window for the master station differs from the number of slave stations on the network Correct the parameter 4 The L ERR LED turns on Check item e Check if 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables are used Refer to Section 3 2 e Check if the station to station distance is 100m or less Refer to the MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual Positioning Control e Check if the Ethernet cables are not disconnected e Check if a 1000BASE T compliant switching hub is used Is the swi
261. rved station setting again another process in progress Data link stop failed another i DOC2H a Wait for a while and instruct the data link stop again process in progress Data link start failed another DOC3H Wait for a while and instruct the data link start again process in progress Another station number change DOC6H i y Wait for a while and set the station number of another station failed another process in progress Another station number setting E DODOH y Wait for a while and set the station number of another station failed another process in progress Check the network status using the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics S of the programming tool Multiple master stations including de DOE4H Gin station e Check if the cables and the switching hub are connected properly Wi i After taking the above actions power off and on all the stations that detected this error or reset them 12 12 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures Network modu
262. s in Baton pass status each station SWODAO to SWO00A7 Stores the parameter status for each station 0 No parameter error 1 Parameter error found b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swo170 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1 SWO0171 swor72 swor7s SW0174 80 79 74 73 72 71 70 SW0170 Parameter error status SW0175 96 95 90 89 88 87 86 to each station swo176 112 111 106 105 104 103 102 SW0177 1201119 118 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWODAO to SWO00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Appendix 26 Appendices Stores if a reserved station setting is temporarily canceled 0 No reserved station setting cancel 1 Reserved station function disable in progress b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Swo0181 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 SW0182 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 SW0183 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 SW0184 80 Reserved station SW0185 96 cancel setting status SW0186 112 106 105 104 S
263. s the buffer memory of the Simple Motion module Appendix 1 1 Link device area Un G59392 to Un G63007 This buffer memory stores the RX RY RWw and RWr values 1 Remote input RX Un G59392 to Un G59903 This buffer memory stores the RX value The RX start number and number of points for each station No can be checked by the RX offset size information Un G63152 to Un G63359 Refer to Appendix 1 2 Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Un G59903 RX_ RX Rx Rx RX RX RX RX RX Rx RX RX RX RX RX RX 1FFF 1FFE 1FFD 1FFC 1FFB 1FFA 1FF9 1FF8 1FF7 1FF6 1FF5 1FF4 1FF3 1FF2 1FF1 1FFO 2 Remote output RY Un G59904 to Un G60415 This buffer memory stores the RY value The RY start number and number of points for each station No can be checked by the RY offset size information Un G63360 to Un G63567 Refer to Appendix 1 3 Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RY b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY Un G59904 F E D Cc B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ane 2 3 unceos1is AY_ RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY 1FFF 1FFE 1FFD 1FFC 1FFB 1FFA 1FF9 1FF8 1FF7 1FF6 1FF5 1FF4 1FF3 1FF2 1FF1 1FFO 3 Remote register RWw Un G60416 to Un G61439 This buffer memory st
264. service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D80AH to D80FH Parameter error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Write the network parameters to the CPU module again D812H to D813H Parameter error e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D814H Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D816H Network module failure against noise e The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e Replace the CPU module D819H CPU module failure e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative D81AH CPU module stop error Check the error in the PLC Diagnostics window of the programming tool D81BH 4 The power is off Turn it on failure EN e The maximum number of writes to the flash ROM is exceeded e Reset the CPU module If a failure occurs again the hardware of the D826
265. servo amplifier and servomotor make sure that the safety standards are satisfied Construct a safety circuit externally of the module or servo amplifier if the abnormal operation of the module or servo amplifier differ from the safety directive operation in the system In systems where coasting of the servomotor will be a problem during the forced stop emergency stop servo OFF or power supply OFF use dynamic brakes Make sure that the system considers the coasting amount even when using dynamic brakes In systems where perpendicular shaft dropping may be a problem during the forced stop emergency stop servo OFF or power supply OFF use both dynamic brakes and electromagnetic brakes The dynamic brakes must be used only on errors that cause the forced stop emergency stop or servo OFF These brakes must not be used for normal braking O The brakes electromagnetic brakes assembled into the servomotor are for holding applications and must not be used for normal braking Z CAUTION The system must have a mechanical allowance so that the machine itself can stop even if the stroke limits switch is passed through at the max speed Use wires and cables that have a wire diameter heat resistance and bending resistance compatible with the system Use wires and cables within the length of the range described in the instruction manual O The ratings and characteristics of the parts other than module servo amplifier and serv
266. ssurance per Station Station is a Selected Assure Block Data function for the Comcel not selected station No 17 to Default Selected Assure 120 1 Link Scan Mode Setting Block Data This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module e Operation Setting for Returning 2 Loopback Function Setting All invalid This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module 3 Block Data Assurance per Station Select whether to assure data integrity on a station basis in link refresh between the CPU module and the Simple Motion module Refer to Section 8 3 4 4 Operation Setting for Returning This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING d Equal assignment and identical point assignment of link points CC IE Field Configuration Equal Assignment or Identical Point Assignment Fy CCIE Field Configuration Module 1 Start I O Er CCIE Field Configuration Module 1 Start I O CCIE Field Configuration Edit View Close CCIE Field Configuration Edit View Close Change Module Change Module gt Change Transmission Path Method f Change Transmission Path Method f Supplementary Setting p Supplementary Setting j Equal Assignment 5 1 Equal Assignment Identical Point Assignment Identical Point Assignment Check gt Online Close with Discarding the Setting Close with D
267. station where control data is stored S2 Start device of the own station where data to be written is stored Device name 01 Start device of the target station where data is to be written A continuous area with the write data length is required System Bit a Control data Device of the own station which is turned on for 1 scan upon completion of the instruction D2 1 is turned on as well when the instruction fails The control data of the SWRITE instruction control data is the same as that of the WRITE instruction Refer to Section 10 6 b Start device of the own station where data to be written is stored The start device of the own station where data to be written by the SWRITE instruction is stored is the same as that of the WRITE instruction Refer to Section 10 6 c Start device of the target station where data is to be written The start device of the target station where data is to be written by the SWRITE instruction is the same as that of the WRITE instruction Refer to Section 10 6 Device of the target station which is turned on for 1 scan upon completion of the instruction Data writing from another station can be confirmed 10 34 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Function a SWRITE instruction overview The instruction writes data by the specified number of words control data S1 9 from the own station start device S2 into the target station word devices after D1 Specify the
268. status each SW0105 96 95 90 89 88 87 86 to station 1 swo106 112 111 106 105 104 103 102 SW0107 12011191118 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Holds the data immediately before the error This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWODAO to SWOD0A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Appendix 23 Appendices Stores the continuation error status for each station 0 Normal 1 Continuation error b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swo110 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1 Swo111 swo112 sworts 6 63 62 61 leo 50 505750 56 5e 50 5251 5049 SW0114 80 79 74 73 7271 70 SW0110 y Operation status each SW0115 96 95 90 89 88 87 86 to station 2 swo116 112 111 106 105 104 103 102 SW0117 12011191118 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWODAO to SWO00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No
269. status for each station 0 Baton pass normal station 1 Baton pass faulty station If multiple stations change from faulty to normal because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan the time until the status changes to 0 Baton pass normal station may vary by several seconds If cables are connected disconnected or the module is reset in line topology the token may be lost or a reconstruction may occur causing the baton pass status to detect an error in the first link scan b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 SWO0A Baton pass status SWOOAO 1 to each station SWOOA1 27 23 22 21 20 eee swooA2 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 SWO0A4 71 70 69 68 swooa5 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 54 83 82 81 swooa7 gt gt gt gt gt gt hr2ojiofrr8 r97 110 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Appendix 21 Appendices Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station 0 Cyclic transmission normal station 1 Cyclic transmission faulty station If multiple stations change from faulty to normal because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan th
270. stem link stop SB0003 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the result when disabling reserved station function 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal Refer to Section 12 5 When Reserved station function disable request SB0012 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Stores the result when reserved station function disable is undone 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal Refer to Section 12 5 When Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Stores the number of total slave stations that are set by the parameters Range 1 to 120 Appendix 19 Appendices SW0059 SWO05A SW005B SWw0064 SW0068 SW0069 SWO0074 SWO0075 SW0076 SW0077 SW007A Number of total slave stations current value Maximum baton pass station Maximum cyclic transmission station Connection status own station PORT line error occurrence rate max PORT line error occurrence rate present PORT1 cable disconnection detection count PORT receive error detection count PORT1 total no of received data lower 1 word PORT1 total no of received data upper 1 word Event count Stores the number of total slave stations that are actually connected by data link in CC Link IE Field Network Range 1 to 120 0 when own sta
271. struction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the READ instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the READ instruction fails 10 12 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d READ instruction execution timing e When completed Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END i i 1 I I 1 I I Start contact 5 1 I 1 Completion device b Device specified in D2 DN Own station CPU Completion status indication device Device of D2 1 OFF Read data storage device Device specified in D1 O LS 100 Simple Motion module y Channel 1 Read data storage device Head module Device specified in S2 I Sequence scan Start contact Completion device Own station CPU Device specified in D2 Completion status indication device Device of D2 1 Completion status Device of S1 1 Simple Motion module Target station error 10 13 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 Error When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Works2 Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to Chapter 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D2 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 of the control data Acco
272. t 1 1 1 1 1 1 l i 1 1 I 1 l 1 1 Read completion device i i i Device specified in D2 i Own station CPU I 1 1 1 Read completion device l l i 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 I Device of D2 1 1 I Setting data i Information specified in 1 n3 n4 N5 CO nN o l 1 i REMFR REMTO instruction f execution status 1 SW0080 to SWO09F sso KX Error code Simple Motion module Error 3 Error When a dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Works2 Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to Chapter 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D2 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Execution status REMFR REMTO SW0080 to SWOO9F According to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action Refer to Section 12 5 10 42 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 Program example The following program is for reading the data in the buffer memory address 256 to 355 of the intelligent function module of the station No 17 target station to D750 to D849 of the station No 0 own station when M111 is turned on a System configuration Station No 0 Station No 17 REMER CPU module Simple Motion REMER Head module Intelligent function module instruction module instruction request source request tar
273. t Whole Network Network No 1 Network Event History List Detaled Information Nox Event occurrence date and tine Event detected station Event history contents gt Tiem Information 083 2013 12 19 09 11 19 Master Station a aa Eaton pass status 0838 2013 12 19 09 11 17 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or ink down a 0837 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data lnk status 0836 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Staton lt lt Omn St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0835 2013 12 19 09 11 15 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or ink down 0834 2013 12 18 15 22 59 Master Staton lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or ink down 0833 2013 12 18 15 22 58 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0832 2013 12 18 14 48 48 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0831 2013 12 18 14 48 47 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or ink down 0830 2013 12 18 14 48 45 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or ink down 0829 2013 12 18 14 48 44 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0828 2013 12 18 14 47 56 Master Staton lt lt Omn St gt gt Status change Baton pass status 0827 2013 12 18 14 47 55 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or ink down 0825 2013
274. t but will be connected to the network in the future must be included in the total number of stations on the network Reserved stations are not detected as faulty stations even though they are not actually connected When the reserved station function is disabled a slave station specified as a reserved station can be canceled temporarily without changing the GX Works2 setting The devices which can specify reserved station specification and temporary cancel of reserved station setting are the asynchronous communication devices The synchronous communication devices cannot specify reserved station specification or temporary cancel of reserved station setting 1 Reserved station specification A slave station can be set as a reserved station in Network Configuration Settings Refer to Section 7 4 CL O 0000 goog DODD 0000 0000 Not actually connected Pate Master station Slave station Slave station Slave station Station No 0 Station No 17 Station No 18 Station No 19 Reserved station Network Configuration Setting El CCIE Field Configuration Module 1 Start 1 O 0000 CCIEField Configuration Edit View Close with Discarding the Setting Close Mode Setting Online Normal Mode w Assignment Method start Er Reserved Error 3 a No Model Name a Alias Host Station Gen Intelligent Device Station No Setting Gen Intelligent Device Station No Setting A Gen Int
275. t contact JPSREAD f H Start contact GP SREAD f Note 3 Note 4 d Bit Word mien a ARE AAA 62 ia ee E ee ee A CS E 03 Note 1 Local devices and file registers set for each program cannot be used Note 2 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used Note 3 For the SREAD instruction the read notification device D3 can be omitted in the programming However the operation is the same as the READ instruction The SREAD instruction can operate differently depending on whether read notification device D3 is omitted or not Note 4 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU or a QSCPU the data set in the read notification device D3 is ignored Operation is the same as the READ instruction Note 5 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU a digit specified bit device can be used Example K4M16 To use digit specification the following conditions must be satisfied The device number should be multiples of 16 10H The number of digits should be 4 K4 10 16 1 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Setting data Setting data Setby Data type Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access Start I O number of the Simple Motion module of the own 16 bit binary station 00 to FEH Upper 2 digits of the I O number expressed in S1 Start device of the own stati
276. t the error then execute the instruction During instruction execution For the case where the instruction is not completed within the monitoring time specified by S1 8 specify the number of times the instruction is Number of resent It can be set when the execution type set by S1 0 is 1 With resends arrival confirmation When the instruction is completed The number of resends result is stored Valid when the execution type set by S1 0 is 1 With arrival confirmation 10 24 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Setting data Setting range Set by Specify the monitoring time until instruction completion It can be set when the execution type set by S1 0 is 1 With arrival confirmation Arrival monitoring If the instruction is not completed within the specified time the instruction f 0 to 32767 User time is resent for the number of resends specified by S1 7 0 10 seconds 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 seconds 1 to 960 Write data length Specify the number of words to be written To QnACPU 1 to 480 words simo used ser The valid or invalid status of data after S1 12 is stored Data is stored when 1 Data at the time of abnormal end is set in the area starting from S1 11 is set in the abnormal end type in S1 0 S1 11 Clock set flag The stored data is not cleared even if the dedicated instruction is normally System completed 0 Invalid 1 Valid Clock data of abnormal end is sto
277. target stations in control data S1 4 and S1 5 When the writing of the data specified by S2 is completed the following devices are turned on e Own station Completion device D2 e Target station Write notification device D3 Own station Target station CPU module Simple Motion module Head module D1 Channel 1 Channel 2 b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following Refer to Section 10 1 1 c Checking the execution status of the SWRITE instruction The execution status completion or error of the SWRITE instruction can be checked using the following device specified for the setting data e Completion device D2 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the SWRITE instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the SWRITE instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the SWRITE instruction fails 10 35 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d SWRITE instruction execution timing When completed Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END l Start contact Completion device O Device specified in D2 cl Completion status indication device Device of D2 1 OFF i i Own station CPU Write data storage device Device specified in
278. tation SW0042 Station No e Range 1 to 120 master station 125 FFH the station number not set Stores the mode of own station SW0043 Mode status 0 Online Normal Mode SW0046 SW0047 SW0048 SW0049 SWO004A Module type Baton pass status own station Cause of baton pass interruption Cause of data link stop Data link stop request station 2 Offline Stores the own station s hardware status b15 to b2 b1 b0 sob PIT Module type 00 Module 01 Board 10 Display Stores the baton pass status for the own station transient transmission possible 0 Data link in progress 2 Baton pass in progress 3 Baton pass stopped 5 Offline Stores the cause of interruption in the communication baton pass of own station 00H At normal communication or power on 30H Cable disconnection 33H Disconnection or reconnection in progress 40H Offline mode Stores the cause which stopped the data link of own station 00H At normal communication or power on 02H Monitoring timeout 05H No slave stations master station only 14H Master station duplication 18H Parameter error 19H Parameter communication in progress 20H CPU module stop error 60H Ring topology configuration master station only Stores the station No of the station that performed the cyclic transmission stop request for the own station Range 1 to 120 125 master station The cyclic transmission stop request is performed by S
279. tatus each station SW00A0 to SW00A7 Baton pass status Erie E SBOOAO each Station Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Baton pass status each station i SWO0AO to SW00A7 may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the baton pass status of the master station master operating station OFF Normal Baton pass status ON Error master station SBO0A1 Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station OFF Cyclic transmission for all stations in progress ON Cyclic transmission not executed for some stations If cyclic transmission are not executed for some stations the status of each station can be checked by Data link status each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 Data link status each y en i SBOOBO Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Data link status each station station ion SWOOBO to SW00B7 may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the data link status of the master station master operating station OFF Normal Data link status ON Error maste
280. tching hub operating normally Refer to Section 5 2 2 e Check if the switching hub is on Are other stations connected to the Simple Motion module a F i Check if the systems on other stations are on operating normally Is the master station set to online mode Change the mode of the module to Online Refer to Section 7 3 Is there any noise affecting the system Check the wiring condition If the above actions do not solve the problem follow the directions shown in Communication is unstable Refer to Section 12 4 5 Are the Ethernet cables operating normally 5 The LINK LED turns off Check item Replace the cables with 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables Are 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables used Refer to Section 5 2 1 Is the station to station distance 100m or less Change the station to station distance to 100m or less Does the cabling condition bend radius meet the specification Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable and correct the bend radius ification Is any Ethernet cable disconnected Replace the Ethernet cable Are the switching hub and other stations connected to the oe Power on the switching hub and the other stations Simple Motion module normal 12 8 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING 12 4 Troubleshooting by Symptom Troubleshooting methods are described by symptom Perform these troubleshooting if data link cannot be performed even though no error is detected in the S
281. the Diagnostics button Refer to b a Checking for error in modules other than the Simple Motion module 1 Select a module other than the Simple Motion module in the System Monitor window and click the Diagnostics button The window corresponding to the module will open The CPU module is selected in the illustration below If the Diagnostics button is not supported by the module click the Detailed Information button When data link cannot be performed even though no failure is shown in System Monitor select the Simple Motion module and click the Diagnostics button i PLC Diagnostics Es p Monitor Status Connection Channel List Monit sts Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image M Model Name Operation Status ___ Switch QO3UDVCPU STOP STOP The function menu is extended from the PLC Eror Information Qo3UuDVCPU Eror Information Continuation Error Information W PLC Status Information Serial Communication Error MODE mu Current Error FF Change the window size and position after error jump RUN 7 z Eror J ERR uma USER e Eror Clear Boor SD CARD __ErorHep Eror History PLC No 1 Occurrence Order Display Descending v Status No Error Message Abbreviation Error Message Detail Year Month Day Time Eror History A 1500 AC DC DOWN AC DC DOWN 2013 12 19 10 38 49 A 1500 AC DC DOWN AC DC DOWN 2013 12 19 10
282. tion device D2 turns on Own station Target station CPU module Simple Motion module Head module Channel 1 Channel 2 b Target stations which can be specified For details on target stations which can be specified refer to the following Refer to Section 10 1 1 c Checking the execution status of the WRITE instruction The execution status completion or error of the WRITE instruction can be checked using the following device specified by the setting data Completion device D2 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the WRITE instruction and is turned off in the next END processing e Completion status indication device D2 1 It is turned on in the END processing of the scan after completion of the WRITE instruction and is turned off in the next END processing only if the WRITE instruction fails 10 27 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS d WRITE instruction execution timing e When completed Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END I Start contact Own station CPU Device specified in D2 DN l l l l I I I l I I l l l a Completion device l l A Completion status i I l l l I I l l I 1 I indication device i scan f Device of D2 1 OFF Write data storage device Device specified in S2 af ii a Soi iis lt 1 a I Simple Motion module i Channel 1 1 i y i l Write data storage de
283. tion 12 3 4 Is the ambient temperature for the module outside the Keep the ambient temperature within the specified range by taking action specified range such as removing heat source Is there any noise affecting the system Check the wiring condition 12 10 Chapter 12_ TROUBLESHOOTING 12 5 Error Code List DOOOH to DFFFH Error codes of the Simple Motion module are listed below A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures DOOOH to DOO7H Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative D012H DO13H Parameter error RWr size over A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and cable distances and grounding condition of each device and take measures D014H to DO16H Network module failure against noise The hardware of the Simple Motion module may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative A malfunction may have occurred due to noise Check the wire and
284. tion No 0 Station No 17 Own station Other station Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Write to station No 17 WRITE Channel 2 Write to station No 18 WRITE J Station No 18 Other station 2 Executing link dedicated instructions to ANUCPU stations a Executing an instruction to ANUCPU stations Never execute a Simple Motion module dedicated instruction to ANUCPU stations Doing so will cause MAIN CPU DOWN or WDT ERROR and may result in an operation stop in the ANUCPU 10 5 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 3 Understanding the Documentation on Dedicated Instructions The following page illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation Instruction name Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 10 4 Reading Data from Another Station This instruction reads data from the desc UTE POTENTE Sanar Execution condition of the instruction in units of words JPREAD Structure of the instruction ere in the ladder mode Available devices Setting data Internal device Link direct device Intelligent function System user 00 module device A device with O is Bit Oe applicable to the instruction z Index register Zn Note 2 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used Note 3 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU a Universal model QCPU
285. tion is disabled the status of each station can be checked by the i SB0180 Reserved station cancel setting status SW0181 to SW0187 function disable status ee i Depending on the timing of the link refresh the update of Reserved station cancel setting status SW0181 to SW0187 may be offset by one sequence scan Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Appendix 15 Appendices Appendix 3 Link Special Register SW List The link special register SW stores the information during data link as a numerical value Error locations and causes can be checked by the using and monitoring the link special register SW in programs 1 Application of link special registers SW By using link special registers SW the status of CC Link IE Field Network can be checked from HMI Human Machine Interfaces as well as GX Works2 2 Link special register SW refresh The link special register SW uses Transfer SW of the refresh parameters to refresh the device of the CPU module Refer to Section 7 6 3 Ranges to which data are stored by users and by the system The following ranges correspond to when the link special registers SW are assigned from SW0000 to SWO1FF e Stored by users SW0000 to SW001F e Stored by the system SW0020 to SW01FF 4 Link special register SW list The following table shows the link special registers SW when they are assigned from SW0000 to S
286. tion is disconnected Stores the maximum station No of the stations where the baton pass is performed Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected Condition This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the maximum station No of the station where the cyclic transmission is performed Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected Condition e This is enabled when Data link status own station SB0049 is off Stores the connection status of own station 08H Normal communication in progress on PORT1 no PORT2 18H Disconnecting cable disconnected on PORT1 no PORT2 28H Disconnecting establishing line on PORT1 no PORT2 Stores the occurrence rate maximum value of received error frames at the own station s PORT1 Unit When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occurrence rate current value of received error frames at the own station s PORT1 Unit When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the PORT1 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned on the stored occurrence rate is cleared When FFFFH is counted the value returns to 0 and the module continues to count Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at the PORT1 The count stores on
287. tion module Master local module Reference QD77GF16 QJ71GF11 T2 READ SREAD WRITE SWRITE SEND RECV Communications within the same Dedicated READ SREAD WRITE A RECVS REQ REMFR Chapter10 network instruction SWRITE REMFR REMTO REMTO RIRD RIWT CCPASET Communications with different Not supported Supported networks RAS functions Specifications Function Description Simple Motion module Master local module Reference QD77GF16 QJ71GF11 T2 Loopback function ie e Not supported Supported E Tal Submaster function E T a Not supported Supported HA Diagnostic function Specifications Function Description Simple Motion module Master local module Reference QD77GF16 QJ71GF11 T2 Diagnostics of Hardware test Notsupported Supported module alone Selfloopbacktest Notsuppored Supported Own network Loop test E 4 a diagnostics Cable test Notsupported Supported Communication Not supported Supported Other network test diagnostics IP communication iest Not supported Supported 5 Other functions Specifications Function Description Simple Motion module Master local module Reference QD77GF16 QJ71GF11 T2 Reserved station specification Target station Station No 17 to 120 Station No 1 to 120 Section 8 5 Temporary cancel of the reserved i Target station Station No 17 to 120 Station No 1 to 120 Section 8 5 station setting Error invalid station and temporary i Not
288. tion numbers are overlapped Check the error details by directly connecting the supported programming tool to the slave station in error and opening the System Monitor window Refer to Section 12 6 5 Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS Status of a station selected in Network Status is displayed in Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Refer to Section 9 3 If Other Modules is selected Selected Station Communication Status Monitor cannot be used If an error occurs a button indicating the error e g PORT2 Communication Error button is displayed Clicking the button allows checking of error details and corrective actions CCIE Field Diagnostics el Mode reduc UNebworkeNo 1 Grange Modde Se for f The selected station status is displayed 1 Click If an error occurs in the CPU module click the System Monitor button to check the error details and corrective actions Various operations can be executed using the buttons under Operation Test Information Confirmation Set and Selected Station Operation on the bottom left of the window Refer to Section 9 4 to Refer to Section 9 7 Various operations can be performed Chapter 9 CC LINK IE FIELD NETWORK DIAGNOSTICS 9 3 Diagnostic Window Network map This section describes items displayed in the CC IE Field Diagnostics w
289. tion s in Reserved station function disable setting setting not set SW0011 to SW0017 and retry the operation Request error of reserved station e Reserved station cancel restoration using SB0012 and SB0013 cannot D70BH cancel restoration when different be simultaneously executed settings are simultaneously e Retry the operation so that only one bit in SB0012 to SB0013 may turn on performed after all bits in them are turned off 12 21 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Data link start stop instruction out of f D720H Check the setting and stop or start data link range Data link start stop retry error D721H Retry the operation after the stop or restart of data link is completed another station Data link start stop retry error own D722H station Retry the operation after the stop or restart of data link is completed i Data link start stop retry error D723H Retry the operation after the stop or restart of data link is completed entire system D724H Data link start stop station error Check the setting and stop or start data link D726H Transient data request command Correct the request command at the request station and retry the error operation e Data link start was instructed from a station different from the one that had instructed the data link stop Instruct data link start and data link stop from the same station Data link start stop command e The method of the data link start differs from that of the data lin
290. tion to be accessed 0000H Control CPU The access destination is the same as that of Target station s when 03FFH is selected 0000H de CPU type 03FFH Control CPU 03FFH If the above error occurs and the instruction fails execute the instruction again e Specify the network No of the target station Target station s 1 to 239 1 to 239 Network No User network No y 254 254 Specify this when 254 is set for Jn Specify the target station number 1 Station number specification Master station 125 7DH Intelligent device station 1 to 120 When 125 7DH is set the module always accesses the master station station number 0 In order to increase data reliability it is recommended to execute the instruction after setting 1 With arrival confirmation to the execution type specified by S1 0 125 7DH 1 to 120 FFH Target station 2 All stations specification number FFH All stations on the target station s network No excluding the own station It can be set when the execution type set for S1 0 is 0 Without arrival confirmation When using all stations specification Specify O3FFH for the target station s CPU type S1 3 Writing of the data cannot be confirmed on the target station For whether data was written normally check the device of the write target station Data cannot be written to the station with the station number already in use or the station with no station number setting Correc
291. tive matter such as screw or cutting chips or combustible matter such as oil enter the module servo amplifier or servomotor The module servo amplifier and servomotor are precision machines so do not drop or apply strong impacts on them Securely fix the module servo amplifier and servomotor to the machine according to the instruction manual If the fixing is insufficient these may come off during operation Always install the servomotor with reduction gears in the designated direction Failing to do so may lead to oil leaks Store and use the unit in the following environmental conditions Conditions Environment Module Servo amplifier Servomotor pica According to each instruction manual ESOO C With to freezing temperature 32 F to 104 F E 80 RH or less Ambient humidity According to each instruction manual With no dew condensation ora mo A o o ge According to each instruction manual ate lid temperature 4 F to 149 F h Indoors where not subject to direct sunlight sphere p No corrosive gases flammable gases oil mist or dust must exist St At Altitude 1000m 3280 84ft or less above sea level According to each instruction manual When coupling with the servomotor shaft end do not apply impact such as by hitting with a hammer Doing so may lead to detector damage 0 Do not apply a load larger than the tolerable load onto the servomotor shaft Doing so may lead to shaft breakage
292. to shorten time mentioned above by reducing the number of link refresh points of the CPU module In the refresh parameters setting set only the link devices used in the CPU module as the link refresh range Refer to Section 7 6 e Directly access infrequently used link devices from the program and remove the corresponding settings from the link refresh range Refer to Section 8 3 3 Setting method The link refresh is assigned by the Refresh Parameters Refer to Section 7 6 Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS 4 Precautions For cyclic data assurance of more than 32 bits use the following method e Enable the Block Data Assurance per Station setting Refer to Section 7 4 Refer to Section 8 3 4 When the CPU module is turned off and on or reset data in latched devices the devices listed in the CPU module device column in the table below may be output depending on the timing of the link scan and link refresh even if the data are cleared to zero on a sequence program Execute the actions listed in the How to disable the setting column in the table below not to output the data in the latched devices CPU module device How to disable the setting te ci initial device value to clear the device to 0 Latch relay L file register R ZR Note 1 Extended data register D extended link Delete all the latch range settings register W device within the latch range Note 1 For the initial device value setting refer to the us
293. ts to the station No 17 to 120 Intelligent Device Station 16 to 2048 D618H will Refer to Section 8 3 1 Remote Device Station 16 to 128 occur Points can be assigned in increments of 16 Start O Remote I O Station 16 to 64 Assigning RX RY OC 0H End OOO FH Device number 0 to 1FFFH points to the Default Blank station No 1 to 16 are all invalid If the value within the setting RX RY Setting range is set an error will not outside the setting range is set one of the Parameter error error code e Points D611H to Intelligent Device Station 4 to 1024 D614H will Assign RWw RWr points in increments of 4 to the Remote Device Station 4 to 84 occur station No 17 to 120 Refer to Section 8 3 1 Remote I O Station Cannot be set Assigning e Device number 0 to 3FFH RWw RWr points Default Blank to the station No 1 to 16 are all invalid If the value within the RWw RWr Setting setting range is set an error will not occur Link refresh target devices in the CPU module are displayed for each link device of the Simple Motion Refresh Device module Target devices are displayed when refresh parameters have been set Refer to Section 7 6 Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Setting range Set this item to reserve the slave station from the station No 17 to 120 Refer to Section 8 5 No Setting lf the error invalid The slave station is connected to the network station is set e Reserve
294. tting Start I O No StartSINo 2 Set the same SI No as the interrupt setting By using link special relay SB and link special register SW as an interrupt condition device an interrupt program can be started in case of data link error Refer to Appendix 2 Refer to Appendix 3 Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING b Starting the interrupt program by an interrupt request to the CPU module in every operation cycle An interrupt request to the CPU module can be executed in every operation cycle by using Operation cycle interrupt request SBOOOC of link special relay SB Simple Motion module Master station CPU module Station No 0 Interrupt program execution 1 1 Set the interrupt setting parameters for the Simple Motion module station number 0 in the Interrupt Settings window as shown below A Network Parameter CC IE Field Interrupt Settings Module No 1 oO ees No ms ciones jo S o O gt O 2 Set the parameters in the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window as shown below Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting a pas No aio Start A ONo StartSINo 0000 0 2 Set the same SI No as the interrupt setting e The interrupt request to the CPU module is executed when cyclic transmission is completed If cyclic transmission is not performed the interrupt request to the CPU module will not be executed
295. ufacturer code 64016 FA10H Station number 17 Model code 0 FA1CH Controller information 64029 S Version FA1DH 64030 to 64039 Model name string FA1EH to FA27H 64040 to 64041 pata gt Vendor specific device information Displays 0 in all addresses FA28H to FA29H 64042 to 64047 gt System area Displays 0 in all addresses FA2AH to FA2FH 64028 Station information Displays 0 in all addresses 64027 FA1BH Model type Appendix 7 Appendices Appendix 2 Link Special Relay SB List The link special relay SB is turned on off depending on various factors at data link Any error status of the data link can be confirmed by using and monitoring it in the program 1 Application of the link special relay SB By using link special relays SB the status of CC Link IE Field Network can be checked from HMI Human Machine Interfaces as well as GX Works2 2 Refresh of the link special relay SB The link special relay SB uses Transfer SB of the refresh parameters to refresh the device of the CPU module Refer to Section 7 6 3 Ranges that is turned on off by users and by the system The following ranges correspond to when the link special relays SB are assigned from SB0002 to SBO1FF Turned on off by users SB0002 to SB001F e Turned on off by the system SB0020 to SB01FF 4 Link special relay SB list The following table shows the link special relays SB when they are assigned
296. ule Instruction Note 1 If the value outside the setting range is set Parameter error error code D62CH will occur and the corresponding interrupt setting will be invalid 5 After the parameters are set open the Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting window Link the interrupt SI number assigned for the Simple Motion module to the interrupt pointer of the CPU module Project window Parameter PLC Parameter PLC System Interrupt Pointer Setting button Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING 6 Click the End button i Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting PLC Side Intelligent Module Side 2 Interrupt Pointer Interrupt Pointer Start No Count StartI O No Start SI No 50 1 0000 0 H Check Cancel Setting range PLC Sid Interrupt Pointer Start No Enter the start number of an interrupt program ILL 50 to 255 Default Blank ide Interrupt Pointer Count Enter the number of interrupt conditions 1 to 16 Default Blank 0000H to OFEOH Start I O No Enter the start I O number of the Simple Motion module Intelligent Module Default Blank Side Enter the start interrupt SI number of the Simple Motion Start SI No Module 0 to 15 Default Blank u Using an interrupt program will eliminate the need for describing a start condition in a program This leads to reduction in the number of steps a
297. ule Connection USB __system Image p Operation to Selected Module RO3UDVCPU Base Information List Module Information List Main Base Base Modue Base Model Name ll sos modes Status 625 Series Modei Name Pont Y al A e A Main Base Exist Q 8 1 Power Power x E A CPU Q QO3UDVCPU le A o0 Q QD77F16 32Point Inteli 32Point 0000 1 0 0 1 Empty Empty 16Point 0020 0 2 Empty Empty 16Point 0030 0 3 Empty Empty 16Point 0040 os ety e 00 06 Empty Empty 16Point 0070 0 7 Empty Empty 16Point 0080 O Error Major Error Bi Moderate Error Minor Error_ 1 Assignment Error_ 6 Assignment Incorrect Stop Monitor Pit _ Product infomation List System Eror Heto Close 2 Select the module in which an error has occurred e When a module other than a Simple Motion module is selected Refer to a e When the selected module is the Simple Motion module Refer to b smem Montor a Ei e e Sit peru A ies irlometan HA tomates Dagrsics _ Eror tisto Deal Hone ES E E ES A ae 1 ont 0080 Legend Eror Major Error Moderate Error A Minor Error_ AssionmentError_ Assignment Incorrect Stop Monitor Port Product formation List System Eror stoy 12 2 Chapter 12 TROUBLESHOOTING POINT If data link cannot be performed even though no error is indicated in the System Monitor window select the Simple Motion module and click
298. unction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable Use 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables for Ethernet connection For the maximum station to station distance and the overall cable distance follow the specifications in this manual If not normal data transmission is not guaranteed 5 Trial operation and adjustment A CAUTION Confirm and adjust the program and each parameter before operation Unpredictable movements may occur depending on the machine Extreme adjustments and changes may lead to unstable operation so never make them When using the absolute position system function on starting up and when the module or absolute value motor has been replaced always perform a home position return O Before starting test operation set the parameter speed limit value to the slowest value and make s
299. ure that operation can be stopped immediately by the forced stop etc if a hazardous state occurs O Before starting the operation confirm the brake function 6 Usage methods CAUTION Immediately turn OFF the power if smoke abnormal sounds or odors are emitted from the module servo amplifier or servomotor Always execute a test operation before starting actual operations after the program or parameters have been changed or after maintenance and inspection 0 Do not attempt to disassemble and repair the units excluding a qualified technician whom our company recognized Do not make any modifications to the unit O Keep the effect or electromagnetic obstacles to a minimum by installing a noise filter or by using wire shields etc Electromagnetic obstacles may affect the electronic devices used near the module or servo amplifier When using the CE Mark compliant equipment design refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines data number IB NA 67339 and refer to the corresponding EMC guideline information for the servo amplifiers and other equipment Note that when the reference axis speed is designated for interpolation operation the speed of the partner axis 2nd axis 3rd axis and 4th axis may be larger than the set speed larger than the speed limit value O Use the units with the following conditions Input power According to each instruction manual Input frequency According to each instruction manual Tole
300. ut a switching hub If an error occurs stations after the faulty P 5 a Note 1 station will be disconnected Line topology Line topology Master station Station No 0 Stations after the faulty station are disconnected Bali ll ca Ue ed Note 1 Add slave stations one by one If multiple slave stations are added at a time all stations on the network will be reconnected and an error may momentarily occur in all the stations Chapter 5_ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION b Station number and connection position Modules can be connected in any order regardless of the station number It is recommended to connect servo amplifiers adjacently When the device transmits data delay time is occurred Therefore when multiple devices are connected between servo amplifiers the start timing of the servo amplifier may be lagged even if simultaneous start has been executed the command has been output at the same timing Station No 0 Master station Station No 17 Station No 19 Station No 3 Station No 2 c Cascade connection Up to 20 layer connection is available for the cascade connection However it depends on the switching hub specification Switching hub 19989 gona pono 000 0000 0000 f S858 Base 8888 Up to 20 layer cascade connection For wiring method refer to the MELSEC Q QD77GF Simple Mot
301. vice Head module Device specified in D1 10 28 Chapter 10_ DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS When failed Start contact I I I I I I 1 Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 ENDA 0 ENDH 0 END I I I I I I I Completion device y Device specified in D2 I Own station CPU Completion status indication device Device of D2 1 1scan__1 I Write data storage device lt A Device specified in S2 2000 ae I I 1 ae I Device of S1 1 LA Erron code I a o oe a Simple Motion module Target station error 3 Error When the dedicated instruction fails error details can be checked by any of the following methods a In GX Works2 Error details can be checked using CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to Chapter 9 b By devices Completion status indication device D2 1 is turned on and an error code is stored in Completion status S1 1 of the control data According to the error code check the error details and take a corrective action Refer to Section 12 5 10 29 Chapter 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 Program example The following program is for writing data of D750 to D753 of station No 0 own station into W300 to W303 of station No 18 target station when M112 is turned on a System configuration Station No 0 Station No 18 WRITE CPU module Simple Motion WRITE Head module request source request target Own station Target station
302. window Parameter Network Parameter Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET CC IE Field Configuration Setting button CC IE Field Configuration Supplementary Setting CCIE Field Supplementary Setting e 4 Block Data Assurance per Station s a m bata 1 Clear the checkbox 4 OK Cancel When there is a remote device station in the network enable block data assurance per station When the scan time of the CPU module is longer the data communication between the Simple Motion module and the slave stations may not be able to be kept constant If a synchronous communication error occurs at connecting the Simple Motion module and the slave stations take measures shown below eLengthen the operation cycle of the Simple Motion module Shorten the scan time of the programmable controller For how to shorten the scan time refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used Chapter 8 FUNCTIONS a Access to cyclic data When link devices are accessed the integrity of 32 bit data can be assured by satisfying the following conditions e When directly accessing link devices The start device number of RWr RWw is multiples of 2 The number of points assigned to RWr RWw is multiples of 2 CPU module Simple Motion module Device RWr RWw Access by using start J device No which is a multiples of 2 and Link refresh in 2 word 32 bit units 32 bits 32 bits e When accessing
303. wo0181 to SW0187 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in Baton pass status each station SWODAO to SWO00A7 e Stations higher than the maximum station No are ignored Stores the setting information of synchronous asynchronous communication of the synchronous communication function for each station 0 Asynchronous communication mode 1 Synchronous communication mode b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Sii sworco 16 15 14 13 12 11f10 9 s 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ncnronous swoico 20 swo1C1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 20 19 18 17 communication to Sa apace swo1c2f 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 36 35 34 33 unction intormation SW01C7 swo1C3 64 63 62 61 60 5o 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 817 9 a sworca a0 79 99 98 97 1 Swo01C6 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 SW01C7 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Stores the synchronous asynchronous communication operation status for each station 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 See sitos re s
304. y ON Chapter 3_ SPECIFICATIONS 3 5 Buffer Memory Network Function The buffer memory is used to exchange data between the Simple Motion module and the CPU module Buffer memory values are defaulted when the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off Buffer memories for the network function are shown below Address ecima ame nitial value ead write efer to Decimal N Initial val Read writ Refer t Hexadecimal Remote input RX Read Remote output RY Read write Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Appendix 1 1 62464 to 62465 for i read and write Link special relay SB 62466 to 62495 for read only 62496 to 62527 for read and write Link special register SW 62528 to 63007 for read only E800H to E9FFH EAOOH to EBFFH ECOOH to EFFFH 61440 to 62463 AAA Link device area 62464 to 62495 F400H to F41FH 62496 to 63007 F420H to F61FH 63008 to 63151 System area F620H to FGAFH 63152 F6BOH 63153 F6B1H RX offset size information 63358 F77EH F77FH F780H 63361 F781H RY offset size information 63566 F84EH 63567 F84FH Station No 17 RX offset Station No 17 RX size O Read Appendix 1 2 Station No 120 RX offset Station No 120 RX size Station No 17 RY offset Station No 17 RY size O Read Appendix 1 3 Station No 120 RY offset Station No 120 RY size Chapter 3_ SPECIFICATIONS Hexadecimal 63568 Station No 17 RWw offset F850H 6
305. y on a station basis in link refresh between the CPU module and the Simple Motion module Refer to Section 8 3 4 4 Operation Setting for Returning This item cannot be set for the Simple Motion module Chapter 7 PARAMETER SETTING Setting range Equally assign link devices to stations with preset conditions Equal Assignment RX RY Equal Assignment ol mes start Staton 1 Station End Staton 3 Station StartNo o Total Points Assigned RWw RWr Equal Assignment e Start Station 1 to the end station Start Station Station 512 End Station Station number Start No End Station Number set to Start Total Points Assigned Station to the end station number Equal Assignment Start No Same values set in RX RY button 1 Start Station Setting and RWw RWr Setting Enter the start station number of stations for which Total Points Assigned Same values link devices are equally assigned set in RX RY Setting and 2 End Station RWw RWr Setting Enter the end station number of stations for which Default Blank link devices are equally assigned 3 Start No Enter the start number of link devices to be equally assigned 4 Total Points Assigned Enter the total points of link devices to be equally assigned Assign the same link device points to all stations Enter the points in the field right next to the Identical Point Assignment button cn 1
306. ycle The following is the formula to calculate the operation cycle Note The calculation result by this formula is a measure value Check the actual operation cycle by parameters and control details to be used Operation cycle usec 6 82 xNs 0 50 x Sr 30 1 x Na 600 ap Ns Number of slave stations excluding servo amplifiers Na Number of servo amplifiers Sr Data size that is actually being link refreshed byte ap Positioning operation cycle usec Appendix 31 Appendices Appendix 5 Comparison of QJ71GF11 T2 This chapter describes the differences in the specifications for master local module QJ71GF11 T2 and Simple Motion module QD77GF16 1 Differences of mode Erre Mon modas DTT Motion module QD77GF16 Master local module Heston SUIS T2 Lo ning O O Online Normal Online NormalMode Fixed cycle Not fixed cycle Communication cycle 0 88ms 1 77ms 3 55ms Fastest cycle Maximum number of transients per link scan 1 4 Slave station x 1 5 operation cycle Differences of performance specifications S ple Iv otion module QD7 7G 6 Master local module QJ7 1GF11 T2 IRWw 1024 points 8192 points i IRWr 1024 points 8192 points Maximum link points per network Ro 8192 points 16384 points IRY 8192 points 16384 points Maximum number of send points per 1024 points 8192 points station IRY 8192 points 16384 points Line topology and star topology Line topology star topology
307. ystem link stop SB0003 Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Appendix 18 Appendices SW004B SW004C SW0052 SW0053 SW0056 SW0057 SW0058 Own station s CPU status Parameter setting status Data link start status entire system Data link stop status entire system Result of reserved station function disable Result of reserved station function enable Number of total slave stations setting Stores the own station s status 00H No module mounted 01H STOP Normal 02H STOP Stop error occurring 03H STOP Continuation error occurring 04H RUN Normal 05H RUN Continuation error occurring 06H STEP RUN 07H PAUSE OEH Reset in progress OFH Initial processing Stores the parameter status 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal Refer to Section 12 5 Condition e This is enabled when the Received parameter error SB004D is on Stores the results when cyclic transmission is started by System link start SB0002 0 Normal 1 or higher Error definition in own station Refer to Section 12 5 When System link start SB0002 is turned off the stored error definition is cleared Condition e This is enabled when Baton pass status own station SB0047 is off Stores the results when cyclic transmission is stopped by System link stop SB0003 0 Normal 1 or higher Error definition in own station Refer to Section 12 5 When Sy

MELSEC-Q QD77GF Simple Motion Module User`s Manual (Network)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents